HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL VOL 1 - 19-00727 - Spori Annex - Ceramic & Sculpture Labs
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Spori Annex Building
Volume 1 │ Divisions 00-05
Project Manual
November 27, 2019
BID SET
BYUI Project # 11513
BYU-Idaho Approvals
Blank Page
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1
Procurement and Contracting Requirements Group
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Table of Contents 2
Invitation to Propose 1
Notice to Bidders 1
Instructions to Bidders 4
Form of Proposal 4
General Conditions (CM/GC@RS with GMP) 16
Supplementary Conditions 1
Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (Cost Plus a Fee with GMP/Bonds) 3
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY 5 01 2100 ALLOWANCES 3 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 2 01 2300 ALTERNATES 2 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 3
01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 3 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 4
01 3100 PROJECT MANUAL AND COORDINATION 10 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 7 01 3233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 3 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 10 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 9 01 4200 REFERENCES 15 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 9 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4 01 7300 EXECUTION 9 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 4 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 5 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 6 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 4 01 7900 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 0000 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 0000 CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 4800 PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 0000 MASONRY
04 2000 UNIT MASONRY
04 2113 BRICK MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 0000 METALS 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 3100 STEEL DECKING
05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS END VOLUME 1
Architecture & Construction Management Services • 283 University Operations • Rexburg, ID 83460-8205 • 208-496-2650
11.27.2019
Contractor Re: Invitation to Propose – KRK 2019 Demolition and Ceramics Lab Construction Project No. – 11513
To Whom It May Concern: The University would like to enter into a CM/GC with a GMP contract with your company. Please submit a bid on the above-referenced project. The project consists of the following:
Brigham Young University-Idaho will construct a new Spori Annex building at the south end of the old Kirkham building site. The Spori Annex (8,797SF) will house sculpture and ceramic facilities for university academics and include parking to the north/east for 98 stalls.
The contract award will fall under the University’s Master Services Agreement and associated Contractor approval process. Construction may begin on 12.19.2019. Construction will complete no later than 09.01.2020.
Pre-construction services are Completed for this project. If pre-construction services are needed
a meeting will occur at , in . You will submit your proposal with your sub-contractor bids online via e-Builder no later than 12.18.19 at 4:00 PM. A performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond for 100% of
the contract will be required for any bid proposal over $250,000.
We are looking forward to working with you on another great project. Sincerely,
Andy Johnson Director, Architecture and Construction Management Services
AJ/nm
Updated 11/18 1 Notice to Bidders
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
SECTION 1 – PROJECT: Project Name: KRK 2019 Demolition and Ceramics Lab Construction Project Number: 11513 SECTION 2 – LOCATION: BYU-Idaho Main Campus SECTION 3 – OWNER: BYU-Idaho SECTION 4 – DESIGNER: BYU Idaho
SECTION 5 – STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS:
The bidder is directed to the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Brigham Young University-Idaho Standard Contract Requirements (February 2018). This volume is an integral part of the contract documents and is hereby made a part of the contract.
SECTION 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION: Date: 09.01.2020 Grounds work may be completed after the building receives substantial completion. SECTION 7 – PRECONSTRUCTION SERVICES MEETING: Date: Time: Place:
SECTION 8 – RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS: Date: 12.18.2019 Time: 4:00 PM Place: e-Builder
The Owner reserves the exclusive right to release all publicity relating to the proposals and the project. SECTION 9 – GENERAL CONTRACTORS: General Contractors will be by invitation only and are selected under BYU-Idaho’s Master Services Agreement. SECTION 10 – DRAWINGS: Drawings are available through e-Builder.
END OF NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Updated 11/18 1 Instructions to Bidders
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 1 -- BIDDING BY INVITATION A. Bidding shall be by written invitation only. Those wanting consideration for such invitation shall apply to: Architecture and Construction Management Services BYU-Idaho 283 University Operations Building Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205
B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids. SECTION 2 -- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract documents may be obtained by the Contractor from:
e-Builder.net B. Subcontractors and suppliers who want to obtain Contract documents (plans and specifications) may do so by contacting the invited Contractor. SECTION 3 -- CONTRACT METHOD A. All work specified is to be done under one general contract. Bids will be accepted by the Owner from prime contractors only. SECTION 4 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. If any Bidder doubts the true meaning of any of the Contract documents, or finds errors, discrepancies or omissions, he shall request a clarification from the Architect in writing through e-Builder. Any interpretations or corrections will be made only by written addenda duly issued by the Owner through e-Builder. Requests for clarifications must be submitted to the Architect through e-Builder at least five (5)
days before bid opening. Unwritten instructions or interpretations will have no validity. B. Should discrepancies appear in the Contract documents that are not resolved by an addendum, it is expressly understood that the Contractor has used the most expensive method and/or material in its bid. SECTION 5 -- REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SUBMITTING BIDS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and structures located there (if any). The Contractor shall thoroughly examine all Contract documents in relation to all conditions that might directly or indirectly affect the contract work. The bid amount shall reflect all such conditions. SECTION 6 -- PREPARING AND SUBMITTING BIDS A. To receive consideration, a bid must be made according to the following instructions:
Updated 11/18 2 Instructions to Bidders
1. Bids shall be prepared on the BYU-Idaho Form of Proposal. All pages including the subcontractor list shall be submitted at the time of bid.
2. Bid Tabulation of Trade Subcontractors shall show the various trade bids in a manner that facilitates easy comparison and determination of the low bidder, with notations explaining post-bid adjustments and rejections. No standard format is provided. 3. Signatures shall be by those authorized to execute the Contract, or by those given authority. 4. The Contractors legal name, business address and telephone number shall be stated. 5. All bids will be submitted and received through e-Builder®. No exceptions. 6. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that the bid is received at the proper time. e-Builder will not accept late bids. 7. Bidders shall accept proposals from only those subcontractors who are approved by the Owner. Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a reasonable objection. It will be assumed that the question of bonding subcontractors, where
considered desirable or necessary by the Contractor, including the cost of such bonds, has been resolved before bids have been submitted. 8. Contractor must demonstrate that their Subcontractor procurement process is done in good-faith,
competitively bid between multiple Subcontractor trades for each subcontract. If the Contractor or Owner deems it necessary to sole source a Subcontract, written justification must be submitted with said proposal and must receive Owner approval prior to entering into a Subcontractual
relationship. 9. In order for the proposal to be considered valid, two or more Contractors bidding as a "joint venture" must have the written approval of the Owner before submitting a bid. All members of a joint venture shall sign the bid and an official representative of the joint venture shall be designated in the proposal. 10. The term "Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP)" shall be understood to include all work contained in the Contract, excluding any alternates or substitutes. The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination. 11. Substitutes or alternates accepted by the Owner may be included in the Contract or added by Change Order. 12. Contractor shall submit all project documentation and correspondence using the Owner’s Project
Management Software, e-Builder®, including, but not limited to; RFI’s, change orders, potential change orders, payment applications, inspection requests, logs, minutes, submittals; or any and all documentation as directed by Owner. SECTION 7 -- APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS
A. The Owner will examine the list of subcontractors submitted with the bids. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any subcontract proposal. SECTION 8 -- FACTORS AFFECTING AWARD OR REJECTION OF BID A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, or to waive any irregularities or informalities in bids received. The Owner reserves the right to accept the bid that will, in the Owner's opinion, best serve the interests of the Owner regardless of whether such bid is the lowest. SECTION 9 -- PRIOR APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Several acceptable brands of equipment, manufactured articles or methods of construction may have been identified in the Contract. It is not intended to close the Contract against other brands, articles, or methods that may warrant consideration. However, unspecified materials must have prior approval by the Owner to be considered.
Updated 11/18 3 Instructions to Bidders
B. Prior Approvals: Requests for approval of unspecified materials must be made to the Architect. The
requests for prior approval shall be considered by the Architect if time permits and if properly documented. The Architect is not bound to consider these items despite their apparent validity. C. Fully detailed technical data, references and other information shall be furnished simultaneously with the requests for prior approval items. D. Such requests shall be reviewed by the Architect and the Owner. If accepted, the approved requests will be included in an addendum. E. The Contractor's "GMP" shall include the furnishing of only those items that are explicitly specified, or which have received prior approval by addendum.
F. Substitutions: Any equipment or material supplier and any contractor or subcontractor may, at his option, submit a substitute price and product for any item specified which he feels warrants consideration by the
Owner. This proposed substitution is to be listed where indicated on the bid form and shall include the amount by which the GMP would be increased or decreased.
G. The Owner may accept or reject any substitute proposed. H. If requested, the Contractor shall furnish information or data concerning the substitute. The Owner may request the Contractor at his own expense to have the substitute tested by an approved testing laboratory. SECTION 10 -- FORM OF CONTRACT A. A copy of the form of the Contract the successful Bidder will be required to execute is included in this specification. SECTION 11 -- ADDENDA
A. All addenda issued before bid opening shall be included in the bid and shall be a part of the Contract. SECTION 12 -- REQUIREMENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER SIGNING THE CONTRACT A. Immediately after signing the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the following to the Owner:
1. Executed performance, labor and material payment bonds, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract sum as specified in the General Conditions. 2. Insurance certificates as specified in the General Conditions. 3. Submit a Schedule of Value (SOV) process within e-Builder to serve as a basis for making monthly payments to the Contractor. 4. A project schedule as to how he intends to construct the project. This must be, in the opinion of the Owner, a realistic method of analyzing and scheduling each component of the work. It must show when all trades or crafts start and finish their work. This schedule must be reviewed at least monthly and updated as required. A critical path method of scheduling is preferred. If the Contractor cannot produce and maintain such a schedule, this service must be obtained from an outside consultant. The schedule must be approved by the Owner's Representative before the
Contractor submits the first payment request.
Updated 11/18 4 Instructions to Bidders
B. The Contractor shall issue subcontracts as mutually agreed between the Owner and the Contractor. A complete list of subcontractors and major suppliers including names, addresses and telephone numbers is
required within fourteen (14) days of the Owner’s subcontractor review. SECTION 13 -- DISQUALIFICATION If the above requirements are not satisfied, the bid may be disqualified at the discretion of the Owner.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDER
Updated 10/18 Form of Proposal
BYU-Idaho FORM OF PROPOSAL NAME OF PROJECT KRK 2019 Demolition and Ceramics Lab Construction PROJECT NUMBER 11513 NAME OF CONTRACTOR
DATE OF PROPOSAL
The undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the Bidder, certifies that the following facts and/or circumstances have occurred or exist relating to the proposed work for the KRK 2019 Demolition and Ceramics Lab Construction project prepared by BYU Idaho.
l. That Bidder has received the contract documents for the above-entitled project. 2. That Bidder has received The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints BYU-Idaho Standard Contract Requirements, revised February 2018. 3. That Bidder is familiar with such documents, has examined the site of the proposed work, including availability of access, utilities, and other similar items relating to performance of the work and is thoroughly familiar with all general and local conditions which could in any way affect this work.
4. That no verbal agreements or representations with or by any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner exist or have been made to the Bidder and the Bidder in submitting this proposal is in no way relying thereon.
5. That if this proposal is accepted, Bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner in substantially the form contained in the contract documents, and will provide the bonds,
insurance coverage and all other items required by the contract documents. 6. The term "Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP)" shall be understood to include all work contained in the contract documents excluding any substitutes or alternates. The Owner will have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination. Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, transportation, services, licenses and permits necessary for the completion of all the work set forth in the contract documents for the sum of: GMP $ Unit Price(s): N/A
Allowance(s): N/A
Updated 10/18 Form of Proposal
Alternate(s): Add alternate #1: Maintain North façade as Curtain Wall system and change the East, South and West façade glazing to Store Front system. Add Alt. #1________________________________________________$_________________________ Add alternate #2: Change glazing specified as ultra clear to clear. Add Alt. #2________________________________________________$_________________________ Add alternate #3: Upgrade sealed concrete floor finish to polished concrete finish. Add Alt. #3________________________________________________$_________________________
AS FURTHER CONDITIONS OF THIS PROPOSAL:
l. The Bidder agrees to complete the work on or before 09.01.2020.
2. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of addenda No. (s) . 3. The Bidder’s contractor’s license number is . 4. Is your bonding capacity adequate for this job? Yes____No____ 5. For verification call . Telephone Number . 6. Is your license limit adequate for this job? Yes____No____
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS
The total sum of the Bidder's proposal shall include the furnishing and installing of all materials, equipment, and labor as called for in the contract documents as a GMP.
Hereafter give the total amount to be added or deducted for a complete installation of equipment or materials other than those specified and those approved by addendum are submitted for the Owner's consideration. All materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be listed below and must meet the requirements of the contract documents. During the time of consideration of the proposals, complete information shall be submitted immediately to the Architect and Owner's Representative. The Contractor is referred to the Instructions to Bidders, Section 9, Prior Approvals and Substitutions for requirements relative to proposed substitutions.
Proposed Substitute Manufacturer & Catalog #’s $ Add $ Deduct
Updated 10/18 Form of Proposal
TYPE OF BIDDER'S ORGANIZATION:
Official Name of Organization
Corporation, Co-partnership, Individual, or Other Address Name of Individual Members of Firm
Name of President of Corporation
Name of Secretary of Corporation Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of Signature ( ) )Seal( Title or Office ( )
Legal Address
Updated 10/18 Form of Proposal
BIDDER'S LIST OF SUBCONTRACT BIDS USED IN PROPOSAL (LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS-MAY USE COSNTRACTORS FORMAT) NAME OF PROJECT: KRK 2019 Demolition and Ceramics Lab Construction PROJECT NUMBER: 11513 OWNER'S NAME: BYU-Idaho
DI
V
.
SUBCONTRACT CLASSIFICATIONS SUBCONTRACTOR USED AMOUNT
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 1 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
GENERAL CONDITIONS for Construction Management/General Contractor at Risk Services (CM/GC@RS)with a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) (U.S.)
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
SECTION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 2 OWNER
SECTION 3 CONTRACTOR SECTION 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE
CONTRACT SECTION 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
SECTION 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
SECTION 7 COST OF THE WORK SECTION 8 CHANGES IN THE WORK
SECTION 9 TIME SECTION 10 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
SECTION 11 PROTECTIONS OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY SECTION 12 INSURANCE AND BONDS SECTION 13 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION
OF WORK SECTION 14 RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
SECTION 15 TERMINATION SECTION 16 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Agreement: the document entitled "Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Management/General Contractor at Risk Services with GMP (U.S.)” executed by Owner and Contractor for performance of the Work. B. Allowance: the items identified as such in the Schedule of Values. C. Architect: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. D. Change In The Work: a modification to the requirements of the Contract Documents or a delay in Substantial Completion resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect to Contractor or from another event or circumstance. E. Change Order: a written instrument prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon the following: (1) the occurrence of a Change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum as a result of the Change in the Work; and (3) the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time as a result of the Change in the Work. F. Construction Change Directive: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Owner which: (1) orders a Change in the Work if the terms of a Change Order cannot be agreed upon prior to performance of a Change in the Work described in Section 8.1 or after occurrence of an event or circumstance described in Section 8.2; and (2) states a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, the Contract Time, or both, resulting from the Change in the Work. G. Contract Documents: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. H. Contract Sum: the total amount set forth in the Agreement payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work. I. Contract Time: the period of time set forth in the Agreement for the Substantial Completion of the Work. J. Contractor: the entity identified as such in the Agreement.
K. Cost of the Work: The Cost of the Work means the costs described in Section 7.1 necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work under the Construction Management / General Contractor at Risk Services (CM/GC@RS) with a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP). L. Day: calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. M. Direct Costs: actual costs for labor, materials, equipment, insurance, bonds, subcontract costs and onsite supervision relating to the Project. They do not include labor costs for project managers or other off-site administration. N. Drawings: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. O. Field Change: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Contractor for a minor Change in the Work consistent with the general intent of the Contract Documents costing $1,000 or less, resulting in no time extension, and which is necessary to avoid delaying the Work. P. Guaranteed Maximum Price: The Guaranteed Maximum Price is the maximum amount Owner is required to pay Contractor for performance of the Work. The Guaranteed Maximum Price is set forth in the Agreement. Q. Modification: a written amendment to the Contract Documents in the form of a: 1. Change Order; 2. Construction Change Directive; or 3. Field Change. R. Owner: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. S. Project: the total construction designed by Architect of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. T. Product Data: standard illustrations, schedules, perfor-mance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate details regarding materials or equipment to be used in the Work, or the manner of installation, operation, or maintenance of such materials or equipment.
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 2 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
U. Project Manual: the document identified as such in the Agreement. V. Samples And Mock-ups: physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish stan-dards by which the Work will be judged. W. Shop Drawings: drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, patterns, templates, and other data which illustrate some portion of the Work and confirm dimensions and conformance to the Contract Documents specially prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor. X. Specifications: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. Y. Subcontractor: any entity supplying labor, materials, equipment, construction or services for the Work under separate contract with Contractor or any other Subcontractor. Z. Submittals: Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups and any other documents or items furnished by Contractor or its Subcontractors to Owner or Architect to demonstrate how any portion of the Work will be accomplished or the type of materials or products that will be used in the Work. AA. Substantial Completion: Completion of the Work to a point where the local building official issues a Certificate of Occupancy. The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified as such by Architect in accordance with the Contract Documents. BB. Work: all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services required by the Contract Documents. CC. Written Notice: notice in writing given from one party to the other at the addresses, facsimile numbers, e-mails, or written within the Owner’s Project Management System, listed in the Agreement, or at such other addresses or numbers as the parties will designate from time to time by Written Notice, and will be effective at the earliest of: 1. The date of personal delivery to the other party with signed acknowledgment of receipt; or 2. The date sent by facsimile transmission to the other party provided receipt of the facsimile is verified by an electronic confirmation report by the party sending the facsimile transmission and further provided that a confirmation copy is sent to the other party by courier or by registered or certified mail within twenty-four (24) hours after the time and date of the facsimile transmission; or 3. The date of receipt by the other party as stated on the return receipt if sent by registered or certified mail, or by courier. 4. The date an e-mail acknowledgement was returned by the receiving party. 5. The date stamped by upload into Owner’s Project Management System or date in process history. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to require Contractor to provide all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by any one will be as binding as if required by all. Contractor will perform the Work in accordance with the requirements expressly set forth in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents.
B. The organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcon-tractors or to establish the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. C. Words used in the Contract Documents that have well known technical or trade meanings are used therein in accordance with such recognized meanings. D. In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents may omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Drawings, the Project Manual, and copies thereof are the property of Owner. Contractor will not use these documents on any other project. Contractor may retain one copy of the Drawings and the Project Manual as a contract record set and will return or destroy all remaining copies following final completion of the Work. SECTION 2 - OWNER 2.1 OWNER’S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE Owner will designate in writing a representative who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner’s approval or authorization. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER A. Owner will be responsible for establishment of property lines and benchmarks for grading. B. In the Pre-Construction Phase, the Owner shall furnish the following with reasonable promptness and at the Owner’s expense, and the Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy of any such information, reports, surveys, drawings and tests, described in Clauses 2.2.B.1 through 2.2.B.5, except to the extent that the Contractor knows of any inaccuracy. 1. Reports, surveys, drawings and tests concerning the conditions of the site which is required by law. 2. Surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a written legal description of the site. The surveys and legal information shall include as applicable, grades and lines of streets, alleys, pavements and adjoining property and structures; adjacent drainage; rights-of-ways, restrictions easements, encroachments, zoning, deed restrictions, boundaries and contours of the site; locations, dimensions and necessary data pertaining to existing buildings, other improvements and trees; and information concerning available utility services and lives, both public and private, above and below grade, including inverts and depths. All information on the survey shall be referenced to a project benchmark. 3. The services of geotechnical engineers when such services are requested by the Contractor. Such Services may include but are not limited to test borings, test pits, determinations of soil bearing values, percolation test, evaluations of hazardous materials, ground corrosion and resistivity test, including necessary operations for anticipation subsoil conditions, with reports and appropriate professional recommendations. 4. Structural, mechanical, chemical, air and water pollution tests, test for hazardous materials, and other laboratory and environmental test, inspections and reports which are required by law.
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 3 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
5. The services of other consultants when such services are reasonably required by the scope of the Project and are requested by the Contractor. C. Owner will furnish to Contractor any information or services it is required to furnish under the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. D. Owner will furnish to Contractor digital copies of the Drawings, the Project Manual, and the Addenda through the Owner’s project management system. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO INSPECT THE WORK Owner and its representatives will have the right to inspect any portion of the Work wherever located at any time. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If Contractor fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents in a timely manner, Owner may order Contractor in writing to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for that order has been eliminated. SECTION 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR A. By executing the Agreement, Contractor represents that it has visited the Project site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated its own observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor will carefully review and compare the Contract Documents and any other available information relating to the Project prior to commencing and during performance of each portion of the Work and will immediately report to Architect any errors, inconsistencies, and omissions it discovers. C. Should Contractor or any of its Subcontractors become aware of any question regarding the meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents prior to commencing that portion of the Work about which there is a question, Contractor will request an interpretation or clarification from Architect before proceeding. Contractor proceeds at its own risk if it proceeds with the Work without first making such a request and receiv-ing an interpretation or clarification from Architect. If neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors become aware of the question until after work on the relevant portion of the Work has commenced, then the following precedence will govern for purposes of determining whether resolution of the question constitutes a Change in the Work: 1. The Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract Documents. 2. The Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the General Conditions. 3. The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the Drawings and the Specifica-tions. 4. An Addendum or a Modification take precedence over the document(s) modified by the Addendum or Modification. 5. The Specifications take precedence over the Drawings. 6. Within the Drawings, larger scale drawings take prece-dence over smaller scale drawings, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. D. Contractor will give Architect notice of any additional drawings, specifications, or instructions required to define the
Work in greater detail, or to permit the proper progress of the Work, sufficiently in advance of the need for information so as not to delay the Work. E. It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with requirements of applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations. However, if Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with those requirements, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing. Contractor will not proceed unless Owner and/or Architect effects Modifications to the Contract Documents required for compliance with such requirements. Contractor will be fully responsible for any work knowingly performed contrary to such requirements and will fully indemnify Owner against loss and bear all costs and penalties arising therefrom. F. Contractor will take field measurements and verify field conditions and will compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to Contractor with the Contract Documents before ordering any materials or commencing construction activities. Contractor will immediately report errors, inconsistencies, and omissions that it discovers to Architect. If Contractor orders materials or commences construction activities before taking field measurements and verifying field conditions, Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for additional costs to Contractor resulting from field measurements or conditions different from those anticipated by Contractor which would have been avoided had Contractor taken field measurements and verified field conditions prior to ordering the materials or commencing construction activities. G. If site conditions indicated in the Contract Documents or other information provided by Owner or Architect to Contractor differ materially from those Contractor encounters in performance of the Work, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing of such differing site conditions. H. Contractor shall submit all project documentation and correspondence using the Owners’ project management system. Including, but not limited to; RFI’s, payment applications, inspection requests, logs, minutes, submittals; or any and all project documentation as directed by Owner. 3.2 SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Contractor will supervise and direct the Work. Contractor will be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work. All loss, damage, liability, or cost of correcting defective work arising from the use of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures will be borne by Contractor, notwithstanding that such construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the Contract Documents, unless Contractor has given timely notice to Owner and Architect in writing that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are not safe or suitable, and Owner has then instructed Contractor in writing to proceed at Owner’s risk. B. Contractor will utilize its best skill, efforts, and judgment to provide efficient business administration and supervision, to furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and materials, and to perform the Work in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interests of Owner. C. Contractor will be responsible for: 1. The proper observance of property lines and set back requirements as shown in the Contract Documents;
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 4 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
2. The location and layout of the Work as shown in the Contract Documents with respect to the position of the Work on the property and the elevation of the Work in relation to grade; and 3. Setting and maintaining construction stakes. D. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of its employees and Subcontractors as well as persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. E. Contractor will not be relieved of its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as a result of any tests, inspections, or approvals by Owner, Architect or their consultants. F. Contractor will be responsible for inspection of portions of the Work already completed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent portions of the Work. 3.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor will provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. B. Contractor will at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among those performing the Work and will not permit employment of any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned to them. The use of tobacco, alcohol or illegal drugs is not permitted on the project site or on the campus grounds. Persons may use tobacco in their personal vehicles. C. Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all materials and work connected therewith until Owner has accepted the Work in writing. Contractor will replace or repair at its own expense any materials or work damaged or stolen, regardless of whether it has received payment for such work or materials from the Owner. D. Contractor will remedy all damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. E. Contractor will be responsible for determining that all materials furnished for the Work meet all requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect or Owner may require Contractor to produce reasonable evidence that a material meets such requirements, such as certified reports of past tests by qualified testing laboratories, reports of studies by qualified experts, or other evidence which, in the opinion of Architect or Owner, would lead to a reasonable certainty that any material used, or proposed to be used, in the work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. All such data will be furnished at Contractor’s expense. This provision will not require Contractor to pay for periodic testing of different batches of the same material, unless such testing is specifically required by the Contract Documents to be performed at Contractor’s expense. F. Contractor will coordinate and supervise the work performed by Subcontractors so that the Work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time, causes delay to the general progress of the Work. Contractor and all Subcontractors will at all times afford each trade, any separate contractor, or Owner, reasonable opportunity for the installation of Work and the storage of materials. G. Contractor warrants to Owner that the materials and equip-ment furnished for the Work will be new unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents, and that the Work will
be free from defects, and will conform with the require-ments of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective in the discretion of Owner. If required by Architect or Owner, Contractor will furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of the materials and equipment used in performing the Work. H. Owner may elect to purchase materials required for the Work. In that event, Contractor will comply with the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents relating to such materials. 3.4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Contractor will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public authorities relating to performance of the Work. 3.5 TAXES A. Contractor will pay all sales, use, consumer, payroll, workers compensation, unemployment, old age pension, surtax, and similar taxes assessed in connection with the performance of the Work. B. Owner will pay all taxes and assessments on the real property comprising the Project site. 3.6 PERMITS AND FEES A. Owner will obtain and pay for all zoning and use permits and permanent easements necessary for completion of the Work. B. Contractor will obtain and pay for the building permit, and all other permits, governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. 1. Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of the permits by submitting a copy of the receipt and an invoice through the Owner’s project management system. Payment shall be made by check or ACH to contractor without processing a Change Order. C. Contractor will secure any certificates of inspection and of occupancy required by authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Contractor will deliver these certificates to Architect prior to issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion by Architect. 3.7 CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE A. Contractor will employ a competent representative acceptable to Owner to supervise the performance of the Work. This representative will be designated in writing by Contractor prior to commencement of work and will not be changed prior to Final Inspection of the Work without prior written consent of Owner. This representative will represent Contractor for all purposes, including communication with Owner. B. The Superintendent shall be present full-time at the project site during the progress of the work. 3.8 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A. Contractor will prepare and submit for Owner's and Architect's information Contractor's construction schedule for the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor will prepare and maintain a Submittal schedule which is coordinated with Contractor's construction
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 5 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
schedule and sets forth specified times for Architect to review Submittals. C. The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedule. 3.9 DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS AT THE SITE Contractor will keep at the Project site for use by Owner, Architect, or their representatives, a record copy of the Project Manual, the Drawings, all Addenda, and all Modifica-tions. These documents will be maintained in good order and currently marked to record changes and selections made during construction. 3.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals are not Contract Documents and do not alter the requirements of the Contract Documents unless incorporated into the Contract Documents by a Modification. B. Contractor will review, approve, and submit to Architect through Owners’ project management system, Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. By approving Submittals, Contractor represents that it has determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that it has checked and coordinated each Submittal with the require-ments of the Work and of the Contract Documents or will make such determination, verification, check, and coordination prior to commencing the relevant portion of the Work. In reviewing Submittals Architect will be entitled to rely upon Contractor’s representation that such information is correct and accurate. C. Contractor will inform Architect in writing at the time of submission of any Submittal or portion thereof which deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor will provide Architect with documentation demonstrating to Architect that the Submittal is equal to or better than the specified product or work. Contractor will not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Architect’s acceptance of a Submittal unless Contractor has informed Architect in writing of the deviation and Architect has incorporated the deviation into the Contract Documents by a Modification. D. Contractor will not perform any portions of the Work requiring Submittals until the respective Submittal has been reviewed and accepted in writing by Architect. E. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, Owner will be entitled to rely upon such certifications, and neither Owner nor Architect will be expected to make any independent examination with respect thereto. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned to Contractor without action. 3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor will be responsible for any cutting, fitting, and patching that may be required to complete the Work and make its parts match and fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a
Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.12 ACCESS TO WORK Contractor will permit Owner, Architect their representatives and consultants access to the Work wherever located at any time. 3.13 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Contractor will pay all royalties and license fees required by the Work or by Contractor's chosen method of performing the Work. Contractor will defend and hold Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent, license or other intellectual property rights or any loss on account thereof. 3.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Owner's representatives, employees, agents, architects, and consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, liability, demands, costs, judgments, awards, settlements, causes of action, losses and expenses (collectively “Claims” or “Claim”), including but not limited to attorney fees, consultant fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of real or personal property, including loss of use resulting therefrom, except to the extent that such liability arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity includes, without limitation, indemnification of Owner from all losses or injury to Owner’s property, except to the extent that such loss or injury arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity applies, without limitation, to include Claims occurring both during performance of the Work and/or subsequent to completion of the Work. In the event that any Claim is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder, that party will bear the cost of such Claim to the extent it was the cause thereof. In the event that a claimant asserts a Claim for recovery against any party indemnified hereunder, the party indemnified hereunder may tender the defense of such Claim to Contractor. If Contractor rejects such tender of defense and it is later determined that the negligence of the party indemnified hereunder did not cause all of the Claim, Contractor will reimburse the party indemnified hereunder for all costs and expenses incurred by that party in defending against the Claim. Contractor will not be liable hereunder to indemnify any party for damages resulting from the sole negligence of that party. B. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will be liable to defend Owner in any lawsuit filed by any Subcontractor relating to the Project. Where liens have been filed against Owner's property, Contractor (and/or its bonding company which has issued bonds for the Project) will obtain lien releases and record them in the appropriate county and/or local jurisdiction and provide Owner with a title free and clear from any liens of Subcontractors. In the event that Contractor and/or its bonding company are unable to obtain a lien release, Owner in its absolute discretion may require Contractor to provide a bond around the lien or a bond to discharge the lien, at Contractor's sole expense.
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 6 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
C. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any claim of any other contractor resulting from the performance, nonperformance or delay in performance of the Work by Contractor. D. No subcontract will relieve Contractor of any of its liability or obligations to Owner under the Contract Documents. Contractor agrees that it is fully responsible to Owner for acts or omissions of Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them. E. In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.14 by an employee of Contractor or any Subcontractor or anyone employed directly or indirectly by them or anyone for whose acts they are liable, the indemni-fication obligation herein will not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 3.15 COST CONTROL Contractor will operate a system of cost control for the Work, including regular monitoring of actual costs for activities in progress and estimates for uncompleted tasks and proposed changes. Contractor will identify variances between actual and estimated costs and report the variances to Owner when requested by the Owner. 3.16 PROJECT MEETINGS Contractor will attend and participate in meetings as required by the Contract Documents and Owner. SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT In the event that Owner terminates its contractual relationship with Architect, Owner will appoint in writing another architect, whose status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Architect in all respects. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Architect will make frequent visits to the site to familiarize itself generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Although Architect is required to make periodic inspections, it is not required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections. On the basis of its observa-tions while at the site, Architect will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Architect’s failure to observe a defect or deficiency in the Work will not relieve Contractor of its duty to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Architect will review Contractor's payment requests and determine the amounts due Contractor in accordance with Section 10. C. Communications between Contractor and Owner relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Contractor with Architect’s consultants relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Architect and subcontractors relating to the Work will be through Contractor. Communications between Contractor and any separate contractor will be through Architect, except as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Architect will have the right to condemn and require removal of the following at Contractor's expense: 1. Any portion of the Work that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Any portion of the Work damaged or rendered unsuit-able during installation or resulting from failure to exercise proper protection. E. Architect will have authority to stop the Work, with concurrence of Owner, whenever such stoppage may be necessary in its reasonable opinion to insure the proper performance of the Work. F. Architect will review Contractor’s Submittals and will accept or take other appropriate action regarding the Submittals. Architect's review of the Submittals will be for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the Contract Documents and will not be conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substan-tiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor. Architect's review of Submittals will not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. Architect's review of Submittals will not constitute acceptance of safety precautions or construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. Architect's acceptance of a specific item will not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a compo-nent. G. Architect has authority to order Construction Change Directives and Field Changes in accordance with Section 8. H. Architect will conduct inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion, will receive and review written guarantees and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by Contractor, and will review and certify or reject Contractor's final payment request. I. Architect or Owner will be the interpreter of the performance and requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect's interpretations will be in writing or in the form of drawings. J. Architect's or Owner’s decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the Contract Documents. SECTION 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK A. Unless otherwise approved by Owner, Contractor will enter into contracts with Subcontractors not owned or controlled by Contractor to perform all portions of the works. Subcontractors will contain payment provisions consistent with Section 10 and will not be awarded on the basis of cost plus a fee without the prior consent of Owner. B. Contractor will not contract with any Subcontractor who has been rejected by Owner. Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a reasonable objection. C. If Owner refuses to accept any Subcontractor proposed by Contractor, Contractor will propose an acceptable substitute to whom Owner has no reasonable objection. D. Contractor will not make any substitution for any Subcon-tractor that has been accepted by Owner and Architect without the prior written approval of Owner and Architect.
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 7 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
E. Contractor must demonstrate that their Subcontractor procurement process is done in good-faith, competitively bid between multiple Subcontractor trades for each subcontract. If the Contractor or Owner deems it necessary to sole source a Subcontract, written justification must be submitted with said proposal and must receive Owner approval prior to entering into a Subcontractual relationship. 5.2 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS A. Contractor's responsibility for the Work includes the labor and materials of all Subcontractors, including those recommend-ed or approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all workmanship and materials under any subcontracts. Any warranties required for such work will be obtained by Contractor in favor of Owner and delivered to Architect. It is expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual relationship between Owner and any Subcontractor, and under no circumstances will Owner be responsible for the non-performance or financial failure of any Subcontractor or any effects therefrom, except to the extent that costs incurred by Contractor resulting from such non-performance or financial failure constitute part of the Cost of the Work payable by Owner to Contractor pursuant to Section 7. B. Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractors promptly upon receipt of payment from Owner for that portion of the funds received which represents the Subcontractor's portion of the Work completed to Contractor's satisfaction for which Owner made payment. C. Contractor will require each Subcontractor to: 1. Be licensed by the state in which the Project is located where such licensing is required by the governing authority; 2. Be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as far as they are applicable to the Subcontractor's work; 3. Assume toward Contractor the same obligations Contractor has assumed toward Owner, including the prompt payment of its Subcontractors; 4. Submit its applications for payment to Contractor in time to permit Contractor to make timely application to Owner; 5. Execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers for payments made by Contractor; and 6. Make all claims for Changes in the Work to Contractor in the same manner as Contractor is required to make such claims to Owner. SECTION 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK OR AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. Owner reserves the right to perform work itself or to award separate contracts in connection with the Project. B. When separate contracts are awarded, "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case will mean the contractor who signs each separate contract. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY A. Contractor will afford other contractors reasonable opportunity to place and store their materials and equipment on site and to perform their work and will properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs where applicable. B. If any part of Contractor's Work depends upon the work of any separate contractor for proper performance or results, Contractor will inspect and promptly report to Architect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for proper performance and results. Failure of
Contractor to so inspect and report will constitute an acceptance of the work of the separate contractor as fit and proper to receive Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. C. Contractor will promptly remedy damage caused by Contractor or any Subcontractor to the completed or partially completed work of other contractors or to the property of Owner or other contractors. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among Contractor and separate contrac-tors as to the responsibility under their separate contracts for maintaining the Project free from waste materials and rubbish, Owner may clean the Project, allocate the cost among those responsible as Owner and Architect determine to be just, and withhold such cost from any amounts due or to become due to Contractor. SECTION 7 - COST OF THE WORK 7.1 EXPENSES INCLUDED IN THE COST OF THE WORK The Cost of the Work will include only the costs set forth in this Section 7.1 incurred by Contractor in performing the Work, subject to the exclusions set forth in Section 7.2 and the credits set forth in Section 7.3. A. Labor Costs: 1. Unless otherwise agreed to by Owner, actual wages plus benefits of construction workers directly employed by and as employees of Contractor (not independent contractors) to perform the Work at the site or, with Owner’s approval, at off-site workshops. Employees of the Contractor also include wages or salaries of the Construction Manager’s supervisory and administrative personnel as identified below whether or not they are stationed at the site but only for the time they actually spend related to this project. 2. Supervisory personnel shall also be billed at actual rates including all taxes and labor burden (excluding travel, subsistence, vehicle and communication costs). These individuals include: Description Rank Project Manager Director Project Manager, Senior Project Manager Project Manager, Jr. Project Superintendent, Senior Project Superintendent Project Superintendent, Jr. Project Engineer, Senior Project Engineer Project Scheduler Corporate Safety Project Safety, Senior Project Safety Project Foreman Project Accountant Project Clerk Project Estimator, Senior Project Estimator Wages plus benefits of any other personnel including, without limitation, executive and personnel (unless required by an Owner Controlled Insurance Program) are not a Cost of the Work. 3. Wages plus benefits of Contractor’s supervisory or administrative personnel engaged at factories, workshops or on the road in expediting the production of transportation of materials or equipment required for
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 8 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
the Work, but only for that portion of their time required for the Work. 4. Costs paid or incurred by Contractor for taxes, insurance, contributions, assessments and benefits required by law or collective bargaining agreements customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health benefits, holidays, vacations and pensions, provided such costs are based on wages and salaries included in the Cost of the Work under Section 7.1, Paragraph A., subparagraphs 1 through 3. B. Subcontract Costs: 1. Payments made for the Work by Contractor to Subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of the relevant subcontracts. 2. Costs incurred by Contractor in taking over, in whole or in part, the work of a Subcontractor or replacing a Subcontractor for cause. C. Cost of materials and equipment incorporated in the Work: 1. Costs, including transportation, of materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 2. Costs of materials described in Section 7.1, Paragraph C., subparagraph 1 in excess of those actually installed but required to provide reasonable allowance for waste and spoilage. D. Costs of other materials, equipment, temporary facilities and related items: 1. Costs for transportation, installation, maintenance, dismantling and removal of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not customarily owned by the construction workers, which are provided by Contractor at the site and fully consumed in the performance of the Work; and the cost less salvage value on such items if not fully consumed, whether sold to others or retained by Contractor. The cost of items previously used by Contractor will be their fair market value. 2. Rental charges for temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not customarily owned by the construction workers, which are provided by Contractor at the site, whether rented from Contractor or others, and costs of transportation, installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling and removal thereof. The quantities of and rates for such equipment rented will be subject to Owner's approval. Rental rates charged by Contractor will not exceed the prevailing rental rates in the Project locale for similar equipment. 3. Costs of removal of debris from the site. 4. Costs of long-distance telephone calls, postage, parcel delivery, telephone service at the site, internet, reasonable petty cash expenses of the site office, cellular phone service, facsimile machine service and copy machine services at the site. 5. That portion of the reasonable travel and subsistence expenses of Contractor's personnel incurred while traveling in the discharge of duties relating to the Work. E. Miscellaneous costs: 1. That portion of Contractor’s premiums for insurance and/or bonds required by the Contract Documents and directly attributable to the Work. 2. Sales, use or similar taxes imposed by a governmental authority which are related to the Work. 3. Any fees or assessments for permits, licenses and inspections which are related to the Work. 4. Cost of tests except those costs which result from the fault or negligence of Contractor’s foremen, superintendents or other supervisory, administrative or managerial personnel. 5. Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design, process or product required by the Contract Documents. 6. Deposits lost for causes other than Contractor's fault or negligence.
7. Legal, mediation and arbitration costs, other than those arising from disputes between Owner and Contractor, approved in advance in writing by Owner and reasonably incurred by Contractor in the performance of the Work. 8. Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work to the extent approved in advance in writing by Owner. F. Costs described in this Section 7.1 which are incurred by Contractor: 1. In taking action to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, as provided in Section 11.3. 2. In repairing or correcting Work damaged or improperly executed by construction workers in the employ of Contractor, provided such damage or improper execution did not result from the fault or negligence of Contractor's foremen, superintendents or other supervisory, administrative or managerial personnel and only to the extent that (a) such costs do not arise out of the type of loss that would be covered by a builders risk insurance policy, (b) such costs are not recoverable by Contractor from others, and (c) Contractor is not otherwise compensated therefore by insurance or otherwise. 3. In correcting defective or nonconforming Work performed or supplied by a Subcontractor and not corrected by them, provided such defective or nonconforming Work did not result from the fault or neglect of Contractor’s supervisory, administrative or managerial personnel to adequately supervise and direct the Work of the Subcontractor and only to the extent that the cost of correcting the defective or nonconforming Work is not recoverable by Contractor from the Subcontractor or others. 7.2 EXPENSES NOT INCLUDED IN THE COST OF THE WORK Notwithstanding Section 7.1, the following expenses will not be included in the Cost of the Work: A. Salaries and other compensation of Contractor's personnel stationed at Contractor's principal office or offices other than the site office, except personnel providing support for the Work pursuant to Section 7.1. B. Expenses of Contractor's principal office and offices other than the site office. C. Overhead and general expenses, except as may be expressly included in Section 7.1. D. Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work. E. Rental costs of machinery and equipment, except as specifically provided in Section 7.1, Paragraph D, subparagraph 2. F. All costs incurred in performing the Work, in correcting defective Work, defective materials or equipment, or in performing any of Contractor's obligations hereunder to the extent such costs arise out of the negligence or fault of Contractor's foremen, superintendents or other supervisory, administrative or managerial personnel. G. Costs resulting from Contractor’s failure to perform any of its obligations to Owner set forth in the Contract Documents. H. Deductible amounts under all insurance.
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 9 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
I. Any type of loss that would be covered by a builders risk insurance policy. J. Any cost not specifically and expressly described in Section 7.1. K. All costs which would cause the Contract Sum to exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price. 7.3 DISCOUNTS, REBATES, REFUNDS AND PROCEEDS OF SALES Cash discounts, trade discounts, rebates, refunds and the proceeds from sale of excess materials and equipment will be treated as follows: A. Cash discounts obtained on payments made by Contractor will accrue to Owner if (1) before making the payment, Contractor included them in a payment request and received payment therefore from Owner, or (2) Owner has deposited funds with Contractor with which to make payments; otherwise, cash discounts will accrue to Contractor. B. Trade discounts, rebates, refunds and proceeds from sales of excess materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor will make provisions so that they can be secured. C. Amounts which accrue to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.3, Paragraphs A. and B. will be credited to Owner as a deduction from the Cost of the Work. 7.4 ACCOUNTING RECORDS Contractor will keep full and detailed accounts and exercise such controls as may be necessary for proper financial management under the Contract Documents. The accounting and control systems will be satisfactory to Owner. Owner and Owner's accountants will be afforded access to Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, Subcontractor files, purchase orders, vouchers, memoranda and other data relating to the Work. Contractor will preserve these documents for a period of three years after final payment. SECTION 8 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
8.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR ARCHITECT TO CONTRACTOR A. If Owner or Architect gives Contractor an instruction which modifies the requirements of the Contract Documents or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price and/or the Contract Time. If compliance with the instruction affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work, the Guaranteed Maximum Price will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in cost subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.1, Paragraphs B through G. If compliance with the instruction delays Substantial Completion, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.1, Paragraphs B through G and Section 8.3, Paragraph A and Contractor will be paid liquidated damages for the delay as set forth in Section 8.3, Paragraph B. B. If Contractor receives an instruction from Owner or Architect which Contractor considers to be a Change in the Work, Contractor, before complying with the instruction, will notify Architect and Owner in writing that Contractor considers such instruction to constitute a Change in the Work. If Architect and Owner agrees that compliance with the instruction will constitute a Change in the Work, Contractor will furnish a
proposal for a Modification in accordance with Section 8.1, Paragraphs C. and D. within seven (7) days. C. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price (except for costs related to a time extension) as a result of an instruction by Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order through the Potential Change Order process in the Owners project management system, containing a price breakdown itemized as required by Owner. The breakdown will be in sufficient detail to allow Owner to determine any increase or decrease in Direct Costs as a result of compliance with the instruction. Any amount claimed for subcontracts will be supported by a similar price breakdown and will itemize the Subcontractor’s profit and overhead charges. Profit and overhead will be subject to the following limitations: 1. The Subcontractor’s profit and overhead will not exceed 15% percent of its Direct Costs. 2. Contractor's mark up on changes to the work will be the fee percentage stated in the Agreement. D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an instruction from Owner or Architect, Contractor will include in its proposal justification to support Contractor's claim that compliance with the instruction will delay Substantial Completion. E. Upon receipt of Contractor’s proposal for Modification, Architect and Owner will determine whether to proceed with the Change in the Work. If Architect and Owner determine to proceed with the Change in the Work, they will issue a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change as appropriate. F. Contractor agrees that if it complies with an instruction from Owner or Architect without first giving written notice to Architect and Owner as provided in Section 8.1., Paragraph B, and receiving a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Change, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefore. G. If Contractor is instructed to perform work which it claims constitutes a Change in the Work but which Owner and Architect do not agree constitutes a Change in the Work, Contractor will comply with the instruction. Contractor may submit its claim for adjustment to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contract Time, or both as a dispute pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction, then Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefore. H. Change Order Proposal Time and Change Directives: The Contractor's proposals for changes in the contract amount or time shall be submitted within seven (7) calendar days of the Owner's request, unless the Owner extends such period of time due to the circumstances involved. If such proposals are not received in a timely manner, if the proposals are not acceptable to Owner, or if the changed work should be started immediately to avoid damage to the project or costly delay, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the changes without waiting for the Contractor's proposal or for the formal change order to be issued. In the case of an unacceptable Contractor proposal, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the changed work on a cost-plus basis with an agreed upon "not-to-exceed" price for the work to be performed. Such directions to the Contractor by the Owner shall be confirmed in writing by a "Notice to
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 10 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
Proceed on Changes" letter within seven (7) calendar days. The cost or credit, and or time extensions will be determined by negotiations as soon as practical thereafter and incorporated in a Change Order to the Contract. 8.2 CHANGE IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN EVENT OR CIRCUMSTANCE A. If an event or circumstance other than an instruction from Owner or Architect affects the cost to Contractor of performing the Work or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price and/or the Contract Time. If the circumstance or event affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work and is caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, the Guaranteed Maximum Price will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost to perform the Work resulting from the event or circumstance, subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.2, Paragraphs B through F. If the event or circumstance delays Substantial Completion and is described in Section 8.3, Paragraph A, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in such Section. If the circumstance or event delays Substantial Completion and is caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, then Contractor will be compensated for costs incident to the delay in accordance with Section 8.3, Paragraph B. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment to the Guaranteed Maximum Price or other damages from Owner as a result of any event or circumstance unless the event or circumstance results from a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect. B. If a Change in the Work results from any event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will give Owner Written Notice of such event or circumstance within twenty-four (24) hours after commencement of the event or circumstance so that Owner can take such action as is necessary to mitigate the effect of the event or circumstance. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in either the Contract Time or the Guaranteed Maximum Price based on any damages or delays resulting from such event or circumstance during a period more than twenty-four (24) hours prior to Contractor giving such Written Notice to Owner. C. Contractor will submit in writing any claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Guaranteed Maximum Price resulting from an event or circumstance within the time limits set forth below. In the event that Contractor fails to submit its claim in writing within the time limits set forth below, then Contractor agrees it will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time or the Guaranteed Maximum Price or to any other damages from Owner due to the circumstance or event and waives any claim therefore. 1. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time due to inclement weather will be made by the tenth (10) day of the month following the month in which the delay oc-curred. 2. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Guaranteed Maximum Price due to any other circumstance or event will be submitted within seven (7) days after the occurrence of the circumstance or event. D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price (except for costs related to a time extension) because of an event or circumstance resulting from the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown as described in Section 8.1, Paragraph C. Any amount claimed for increased labor costs as a result of the event or circumstance must be supported by a certified payroll. Any claim for rented
equipment or additional material costs must be supported by invoices. E. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance, Contractor will include with its claim copies of daily logs, letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets, Project schedules, and other supporting information necessary to justify Contractor’s claim that the event or circumstance delayed Substantial Completion. If Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will be compen-sated for all costs related to the delay in accordance with Section 8.3, Paragraph B. F. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of Contractor's claim, Architect will either deny the claim or recommend approval to Owner. If Owner approves the claim, the adjustment in the Contract Time and/or Guaranteed Maximum Price will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 8.5 or a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 8.6. If Owner or Architect denies Contractor's claim, Contractor may submit its claim as a dispute pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) days of receipt of the denial of the claim. If Contractor fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 14 within the thirty (30) day time period, then Contractor agrees it is not entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time and/ or Guaranteed Maximum Price or any other damages as a result of the event or circumstance and waives any claim therefore. 8.3 EXTENSIONS OF TIME A. If Substantial Completion of the Project is delayed because of any of the following causes, then the Contract Time will be extended by Change Order for a period of time equal to such delay: 1. Labor strikes or lock-outs; 2. Inclement weather; 3. Unusual delay in transportation; 4. Unforeseen governmental requests or requirements; 5. A Change in the Work resulting from an instruction by Owner or Architect to Contractor subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.1.; or 6. Any other event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect. B. Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for delay described in Section 8.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 1, 2, 3 and 4. For each day of delay in Substantial Completion described in Section 8.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 5 and 6. If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 8.2 paragraph C, shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. Contractor for all damages resulting from any delay including but not limited to damages for general conditions costs, additional job site costs, additional home office overhead costs, disruption costs, acceleration costs, increase in labor costs, increase in subcontract costs, in-crease in materials costs, and any other costs incident to the delay. Contractor will be entitled to no other compensa-tion relating to the delay. Liquidated damages for delays will be provided to the Owner as outlined in Supplementary Conditions. 8.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGES IN THE WORK Every Change in the Work will be documented by a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 11 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
Change. If Owner, Architect and Contractor reach agreement regarding the adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price, if any, and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, resulting from a Change in the Work, then the parties will execute a Change Order pursuant to Section 8.5. If Owner, Architect and Contractor cannot reach agreement regarding the adjustment in Guaranteed Maximum Price or the adjustment in Contract Time resulting from a Change in the Work, then Owner and Architect will issue a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 8.6. Field Changes require the agreement of Architect or Owner and Contractor only. 8.5 CHANGE ORDERS Contractor's signature upon a Change Order is Contractor's acknowledgment that it is not entitled to any additional adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or the Contract Time or any other damages or compensation as a result of the Change in the Work other than that provided for in the Change Order, irrespective of whether a subsequent claim for additional compensation or time extensions relating to the Change in the Work is described as a change in the requirements of the Contract Documents, a delay, a disruption of the Work, an acceleration of the Work, an impact on the efficiency of performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment, or other claim and irrespective of whether the impact of the Change in the Work is considered singly or in conjunction with the impact of other Changes in the Work. 8.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Contractor will promptly comply with all Construction Change Directives. B. Pending final resolution of any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or Contract Time relating to a Construction Change Directive, the amounts proposed by Owner in the Construction Change Directive may be included in Contractor's payment requests once the work relating thereto is completed. C. If after the work described in the Construction Change Directive is completed, Owner, Architect, and Contractor reach agreement on adjustments in the Guaranteed Maximum Price, Contract Time, or both, such agreement will be reflected in an appropriate Change Order. D. If the parties do not reach agreement regarding an adjust-ment to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, Contract Time, or both relating to the Construction Change Directive within thirty (30) days of the completion of the work described therein, then Contractor may submit its claim for an adjustment pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) days of the completion of such work. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) days of completion of the work described in the Construction Change Directive, then it will not be entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or Contract Time resulting from such work except as set forth in the Construction Change Directive and waives any claim therefore. 8.7 FIELD CHANGES Architect or Owner and Contractor will sign a Field Change order listing the Change In The Work and the Guaranteed Maximum Price including markups before Contractor proceeds with the Field Change. 8.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS Except as set forth in this Section 8, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price
or the Contract Time or for any damages of any kind whatsoever resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect, any event or circumstance, or any act or omission of Owner or Architect and Contractor expressly waives any and all claims therefore. 8.9 OWNER’S RIGHT TO AUDIT A. Liability Insurance and Bonds: In the event the Contractor has been required to furnish comprehensive general liability insurance and/or performance and/or payment bonds as part of the base contract price, a contract change order will be processed to account for the Contractor's net increase or decrease in comprehensive general liability insurance costs and/or bond premium costs associated with change orders to Contractor's base contract price. B. Accurate Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor (subcontractor or sub-sub contractor) agrees that it is responsible for submitting accurate cost and pricing data to support its Lump Sum Change and/or Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other contract price adjustments under the contract. Contractor further agrees to submit change order proposals with cost and pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in accordance with the terms of the contract with respect to pricing of change orders. C. Right to Verify Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor, subcontractor and sub-sub-contractor agrees that any designated Owner's representative will have the right to examine (copy or scan) the records of the Contractor, subcontractor or sub-sub contractor’s records (during the contract period and up to three years after final payment is made on the contract) to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price all change order proposals and/or claims. Contractor agrees that if the Owner determines the cost and pricing data submitted (whether approved or not) was inaccurate, incomplete, not current, or not in compliance with the terms of the contract regarding pricing of change orders, an appropriate contract price adjustment will be made. Such post-approval contract price adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and/or subcontractors and to all types of change order proposals specifically including lump sum change orders, unit price change orders, and cost-plus change orders. D. Requirements for Detailed Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor, subcontractor agrees to provide and require all Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors to provide a breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost information. This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden related to change order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate estimate of the Contractor's actual labor and labor burden cost components. This information is not intended to establish fixed billing or change order pricing labor rates. However, at the time change orders are priced, the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price change order work. The accuracy of any such agreed upon labor cost components used to price change orders will be subject to later audit. Approved change order amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate. SECTION 9 - TIME 9.1 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. By executing the Agreement, Contractor confirms
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 12 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. Contractor will proceed expeditiously with adequate resources and will achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 9.2 COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK Contractor will not commence work on the Project site until the date set forth in the Written Notice to proceed. However, Contractor may enter into subcontracts and secure material for the Project after receipt of the Agreement with Owner's authorized signature. Owner will issue the Written Notice to proceed within forty-five (45) days after Owner receives acceptable bonds and evidence of insurance pursuant to Section 12 unless Owner earlier terminates the Agreement pursuant to Section 15. 9.3 DELAY IN COMPLETION OF THE WORK A. For each day after the expiration of the Contract Time that Contractor has not achieved Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay Owner the amount set forth in the Supple-mentary Conditions as liquidated damages for Owner's loss of use of the Project and the added administrative expense to Owner to administer the Project during the period of delay. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay. Owner may deduct any liquidated damages or reimbursable expenses from any money due or to become due to Contractor. If the amount of liquidated damages and reimbursable expenses exceeds any amounts due to Contractor, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request from Owner for payment. B. At the time Architect certifies that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion, Architect will identify the remaining items to be completed for final completion of the Work and will establish with Contractor a reasonable time for completion of those items. Architect will set forth the items to be completed and the time established for their completion in a Certificate of Substantial Completion. For each day that Contractor exceeds the time allowed for completion of the items set forth in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay to Owner as liquidated damages for additional administrative expenses the amount set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay in completing such items. SECTION 10 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor will submit to Architect and Owner with its signed Agreement a schedule of values which allocates the Guaranteed Maximum Price among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values will be supported as well by any other data required by Owner to substantiate its accuracy and will be the basis for Contractor's payment requests. Allowance line item amounts will not be transferred from one line item to another without Owner’s consent. 10.2 PAYMENT REQUESTS A. No more than once a month, Contractor will submit a payment request to Architect for work completed, materials stored on site, and for materials stored offsite as of the date of the payment request. The amount of the payment request
will be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by Contractor and will be equal to: 1. The value of the Work completed. (The value of the Work completed will be the percentage of the completed work specified in the Schedule of Values as Sub Bid Work plus the portions of the work specified in the Schedule of Values as Contractor's Estimated Costs that have been actually incurred by Contractor. Owner may request supporting documentation to be submitted by Contractor with the payment request.) 2. Plus the value of the Work completed times the Contractor's Fee percentage. 3. Less 5% retention amounts retained by Owner. 4. Less all prior amounts paid by Owner to Contractor as part of the Contract Sum. 5. Less allowable offsets. The payment request may include Changes in the Work that have been performed by Contractor and authorized by Owner and/or Architect pursuant to Section 8. If a payment request includes materials stored offsite, Contractor will include with the payment request a list of the materials, the location where they are stored and the written request of Contractor and its performance bond surety that payment be made for such materials. B. Contractor warrants and guarantees that upon the receipt of payment for materials and equipment, whether incorpo-rated in the Project or not, title to such materials and equipment will pass to Owner free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances. Notwithstanding this payment and passage of title, Contractor will remain responsible for all such materials and equipment until actual delivery to the project site, incorporation into the Work and final acceptance by Owner. Contractor further warrants that no material or equipment covered by a payment request is subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or any other person or entity. 10.3 PAYMENT REQUEST CERTIFICATION A. Architect will, within seven (7) days after receipt of Contractor's payment request, forward to Owner the pay-ment request certified for such amount as Architect determines is properly due. If Architect certifies less than the full amount of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner of Architect's reasons for withholding certification of the full amount requested. B. The certification of the payment request will constitute a representation by Architect to Owner based upon Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the payment request, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of Architect's knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by Architect. However, the certification of the payment request will not constitute a representation that Architect has: 1. Conducted exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quantity or quality of the Work; 2. Reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; 3. Reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcon-tractors or other data requested by Owner to substanti-ate Contractor's right to payment; or 4. Made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 13 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
C. In taking action on Contractor’s payment request, Owner will be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by Contractor. 10.4 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION AND PAYMENT A. Architect may withhold certification of a payment request in whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner if, in the opinion of Architect, the representations to Owner required by Section 10.3, Paragraph B cannot be accurately made. If Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 10.3, Paragraph A. If Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, Architect will promptly certify a payment request for the amount for which Architect is able to make such representations to Owner. Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a payment request previously certified, to such extent as may be necessary in Architect's opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: 1. Defective work not remedied; 2. Third-party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; 3. Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors for labor, materials, equipment, construction or services; 4. Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Guaranteed Maximum Price; 5. Damage to Owner or another contractor for which Contractor is responsible; 6. Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance will not be adequate to cover the cost of completing the Work and damages for the anticipated delay; or 7. Contractor's persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor, subsequent to Architect's certification of any payment request, in order to protect Owner from loss due to any condition described in Section 10.4, Paragraph A, Subparagraphs 1 through 7. Upon satisfactory resolution of any such conditions, payments so withheld will be made. 10.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Section 10.2 within fifteen (15) days after: 1. Contractor has submitted a progress payment request; 2. Contractor has submitted Conditional Waiver and Release Upon Progress Payment documents (in content complying with Idaho Code executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractor’s progress payment request; and 3. Owner receives the certified payment request from Architect. B. Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any amounts withheld pursuant to Section 10.4 within fifteen (15) days after Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, submits its payment request for retained funds and delivers to Architect Owner’s form entitled “Contractor’s Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety” fully executed by Contractor and its surety. Owner is entitled to withhold a portion of the retained funds until punch list items are resolved and final completion of work occurs. This amount will be determined in Supplementary Conditions.
C. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the mail addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owner’s discretion. D. Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor within 30 days of receipt of payment from Owner the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. E. Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project site for review by the Subcontractors. F. No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship. 10.6 FINAL PAYMENT A. Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum within thirty (30) days of the completion of all of the following requirements: 1. Contractor has submitted its final payment request; 2. Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete; and 3. Contractor has submitted Waiver and Release Upon Final Payment documents executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractor’s final payment request. B. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcon-tractor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 8 and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending. C. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner. SECTION 11 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS Contractor will be responsible to Owner for initiating and supervising all safety programs in connection with the performance of the Work. 11.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Contractor will take reasonable precautions to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. All persons on the site; 2. The Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo-rated into the Work; and 3. Other property at the site or adjacent to it. B. Contractor will give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and other lawful requirements of public authorities with applicable jurisdiction bearing on the safety or protection of persons and property. C. Contractor will designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty will be the prevention of accidents. This person will be Contractor's onsite representative unless otherwise designated in writing by Contractor to Owner and Architect. 11.3 EMERGENCIES
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 14 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the safety of any person or property, Contractor may, without waiting for specific authorization from Architect or Owner, act at its own discretion to safeguard persons or property. Contractor will immediately notify Architect and Owner of such emergency action and make a full written report to Architect and Owner within five (5) days after the event. SECTION 12 - INSURANCE AND BONDS 12.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Contractor will obtain the following insurance and provide evidence thereof as described below prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier: 1. Workers Compensation Insurance. 2. Employers Liability Insurance with minimum limits of the greater of $500,000 per accident/disease or as required by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 3. Commercial General Liability Insurance – ISO Form CG 00 01 (2016/03) or equivalent Occurrence Policy which will provide primary coverage in the event of any Occurrence Claim, or Suit, with: a. Limits of not less than: 1) $2,000,000 General Aggregate; 2) $2,000,000 Products – Comp/OPS Aggregate: 3) $1,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury: 4) $1,000,000 Each Occurrence; 5) $50,000 Fire Damage (any one fire); and 6) $5,000 Medical Expense (any one person). b. Endorsements attached thereto including the following or their equivalent: 1) ISO Form CG 25 03 (2016/03), Amendment Of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises), describing the Agreement and specifying limits as shown above. 2) ISO Form CG 20 10 (2016/03), Additional In-sured – Owners, Lessees, Or Contractors (Form B), naming Owner and Architect as addi-tional insureds. 4. Automobile Liability Insurance, with: a. A minimum limit of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit per accident; and b. Coverage applying to “Any Auto.” A. Contractor will provide evidence of such insurance to Owner as follows: 1. Deliver to Owner a Certificate of Insurance, on ACORD 25 (2016/03) Form, or equivalent: a. Listing Owner as a Certificate Holder and Additional Insured on general liability and any excess liability policies; b. Attaching the endorsements set forth above. (Note: If forms other than ISO forms are used, copies of the non-ISO forms will be attached to this certificate); c. Identifying the Project by specifying individual project name, on said certificate; d. Containing a cancellation clause of the certificate amended to read: “Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing insurer will mail 30 days prior written notice to the certificate holder names to the left”; e. Listing the insurance companies providing coverage (All companies listed must be rated “B+ Class VII” or better in the A.M. Best Company Key Rating Guide-Property-Casualty, current edition); and f. Bearing the name, address and telephone number of the producer and an original signature of the authorized representative of the producer.
C. Contractor will maintain, from commencement of the Work, Insurance coverage required in Section 12.1 as follows: 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance through expiration of warranty period, including completion of any warranty repairs; and 2. All other insurance through Final Payment. D. Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company, policy, endorsement, or certificate of insurance with or without cause. E. The cost of insurance as required above will be the obligation of Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for payment of all deductible amounts under all insurance. F. Builders risk insurance will be provided by either the Contractor or Owner, dependent upon the below criteria Risk Management Guidelines, the cost of the Project. 1. Up to $100,000: (Owner Self-Insured) Builders Risk Policy is not required by Contractor. a. $5,000 deductible paid by Contractor per occurrence. b. Deductible is not a reimbursable or Cost of the Work, expense. 2. $100,001 to $5,000,000: Builders Risk Policy to be provided by Contractor. a. $5,000 policy deductible to be paid by Contractor b. Deductible is not a reimbursable or Cost of the Work, expense. 3. Over $5,000,000: Determined by LDS Church Risk Management on a per project basis and as specified in the Supplementary Conditions. G. The policy will be written on an all risk basis with coverage for perils of wind, flood, earthquake, and terrorism, with exclusions standard for the insurance industry. The terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy shall govern coverage. In addition, when there is a loss which may be covered by the builders risk insurance policy, Contractor will comply with the following: 1. Contractor will report the loss immediately to the Owner. 2. Contractor will immediately notify its general liability insurance carrier of the loss. 3. Contractor will take all necessary and appropriate actions to protect the property and individuals from further loss, harm, and injury. In the event there are damages resulting from fire or water, restoration shall be performed only by a certified restoration contractor. 4. To the extent possible, Contractor will preserve and not disturb the evidence of the loss until after the builders risk commercial insurer and all interested parties and their insurance carriers have had the opportunity to view and investigate the site and loss. 5. Contractor will cooperate with Owner and the builders risk commercial insurer in the investigation, documentation, and settlement of loss claims, including without limitation promptly responding to all requests for information and documentation from the builders risk commercial insurer and/or Owner. 12.2 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. Prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier, Contractor will furnish to Owner a performance bond and a labor and material payment bond each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum as security for all obligations arising under the Contract Documents. Such bonds will: 1. Be written on Form AIA Document A312 - 2010. 2. Be issued by a surety company or companies licensed in the state in which the Project is located and holding
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 15 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
valid certificates of authority under Sections 9304 to 9308, Title 31, of the United States Code as acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on federal bonds. 3. Have a penal sum obligation not exceeding the authorization shown in the current revision of Circular #670 as issued by the United States Treasury Department, i.e. “Treasury List”. 4. Be accompanied by a certified copy of the power of attorney stating the authority of the attorney-in-fact executing the bonds on behalf of the surety. B. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety company, performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with or without cause. C. The cost of the bonds as required above will be the obligation of Contractor. D. Labor, Material Payment and/or Performance Bonds on Bid Proposals less than $250,000 are not required. Proposals exceeding $250,000 require the above bonding requirements outlined in section 12.2. SECTION 13 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK Contractor will notify Architect and Owner at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of performing work which would cover up work or otherwise make it difficult to perform inspections required by the Specifications or by applicable governing authorities. Should any such work be covered without proper notification having been given to Architect and Owner, Contractor will uncover that work for inspection and replace that work at Contractor’s own expense. 13.2 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Contractor will promptly correct any portion of the Work which is rejected by Architect, Owner or which fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor will bear the cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspection costs, compensation for Architect’s and Owner’s services, and any other expenses made necessary thereby. B. Contractor will remedy any defects due to faulty materials, equipment, or workmanship which appear within a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. Contractor will pay all costs of correcting faulty work, including additional Architect's fees , attorneys fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses when incurred. C. Nothing in the Contract Documents will be construed to establish a period of limitation within which Owner may enforce the obligation of Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents. The one year period specified above has no relationship to the time within which compliance with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations. 13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. If Owner prefers to accept any portion of the Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring removal and correction of the
nonconforming Work. In that event, the Contract Sum will be reduced by an amount agreed upon by the parties which reflects the difference in value to Owner between the Work as specified and the nonconforming Work. The Guaranteed Maximum Price will also be reduced by an amount identical to the reduction in the Contract Sum. Such adjustment may consider increased maintenance costs, early replacement costs, increased inefficiency of use, and the like and will be effective whether or not final payment has been made. Such adjustment will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 8.5. B. Temporary or trial usage by Owner or Architect of me-chanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment, or other work or materials supplied under the Contract Documents prior to written acceptance by Architect, will not constitute Owner's acceptance. SECTION 14 - RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 14.1 PROCEDURE In the event there is any dispute arising under this Agreement which cannot be resolved by agreement between the parties, either party may submit the dispute with all documentation upon which it relies to University Operations, Managing Director, 525 South Center Street, Rexburg, Idaho 83460, who will convene a dispute resolution conference within thirty (30) days. The dispute resolution conference will constitute settlement negotiations and any settlement proposal made pursuant to the conference will not be admissible as evidence of liability. In the event that the parties do not resolve their dispute pursuant to the dispute resolution conference, either party may commence legal action to resolve the dispute. Any such action must be commenced within six (6) months from the first day of the dispute resolution conference or be time barred. Submission of the dispute to the Director as outlined above is a condition precedent to the right to commence legal action to resolve any dispute. In the event that either party commences legal action to adjudicate any dispute without first submitting the dispute to the Director, the other party will be entitled to obtain an order dismissing the litigation without prejudice and awarding such other party any costs and attorneys fees incurred by that party in obtaining the dismissal, including without limitation copy costs, and expert and consultant fees and expenses. 14.2 CONTRACTOR TO PROCEED WITH DILIGENCE Pending final resolution of a dispute hereunder, Contractor will proceed diligently with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement. SECTION 15 - TERMINATION
15.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR In the event Owner materially breaches any term of the Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly give Written Notice of the breach to Owner. If Owner fails to cure the breach within thirty (30) days of the Written Notice, Contractor may terminate this Agreement by giving Written Notice to Owner and recover from Owner, subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Cost of the Work through the date of termination plus the percentage of the Contractor’s Fee thereon, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compen-sation or damages as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefore. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials which Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 16 General Conditions CM/GC@RS
section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 15.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE Should Contractor fail to provide Owner with the certificates of insurance required by Section 12 within the time specified therein, make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, fail to apply enough properly skilled workmen or specified materials to properly prosecute the Work in accordance with Contractor’s schedule, or otherwise materially breach any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without any prejudice to any other right or remedy, give Contractor Written Notice thereof. If Contractor fails to cure its default within thirty (30) days, Owner may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Contractor. In such case, Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor and/or take possession of the premises and all materials, tools, equipment, and appliances thereon, and finish the Work by whatever method Owner deems expedient. Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment of outstanding Costs of the Work or Contractor’s Fee thereon (less offsets and subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price) until the Work is finished. Contractor will also be liable to Owner for reimbursement of all additional administrative, architectural, consultant, and legal expenses (including without limitation attorneys fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses) incurred by the Owner relative to the Owner’s termination for cause. In addition, should Owner’s expense to complete the Work exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price, Contractor will be liable to pay the difference to Owner. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials which Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 15.3 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Notwithstanding any other provision contained in the Contract Documents, Owner may, without cause and in its absolute discretion, terminate the Agreement at any time. In the event of such termination, Contractor will be entitled to recover from Owner, subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Cost of the Work through the date of termination plus the percentage of the Contractor’s Fee thereon, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefore. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials which Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. SECTION 16 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 16.1 GOVERNING LAW The parties acknowledge that the Contract Documents have substantial connections to the State of Idaho. The Contract Documents will be deemed to have been made, executed,
and delivered in Rexburg, Idaho. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related to their creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Idaho, excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract Documents will be decided only in a state or federal court located in Pocatello, Idaho and not in any other court or state. Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Pocatello, Idaho and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise. 16.2 NO WAIVER No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect, or Contractor will constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor will such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 16.3 RULE OF CONSTRUCTION Owner and Contractor agree that the Contract Documents will be deemed to have been drafted by both Owner and Contractor and will not be construed against either Owner or Contractor because of authorship. 16.4 ENFORCEMENT In the event either party commences legal action to enforce or rescind any term of the Contract Documents, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover its attorneys fees and costs, including without limitation all copy costs and expert and consultant fees and expenses, incurred in that action and on all appeals, from the other party. 16.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Owner and Architect have the right to have tests made when they deem it necessary. Tests conducted by Owner or Architect will be paid for by Owner. Should a test reveal a failure of the Work to meet Contract Document requirements, the cost of the test as well as subsequent tests related to the failure necessary to determine compliance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by Owner, with the cost thereof deducted from the Contract Sum by Modification. B. Tests will be made in accordance with recognized stan-dards by a competent, independent testing laboratory. Materials found defective or not in conformity with Contract Document requirements will be promptly replaced or repaired at the expense of Contractor. C. Owner and Architect have the right to obtain samples of materials to be used in the Work and to test samples for determining whether they meet Contract Document require-ments. Samples required for testing will be furnished by Contractor and selected as directed by Architect. Samples may be required from the sample's source, point of manufacture, point of delivery, or point of installation at Architect's discretion. Samples not required as a Submittal in the Specifications will be paid for by Owner. Should tests reveal a failure of the Sample to meet the Contract Document requirements, Contractor will provide other Samples that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
END OF DOCUMENT
Updated 10/18 – Revision 01 Page 1 Supplementary Conditions CM/GC@RS
S U P P L E M E N T A R Y C O N D I T I O N S for Construction Management/General Contractor at Risk Services (CM/GC@RS)with a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) (U.S.) ITEM 1 - GENERAL 1. Conditions of the Contract apply to each Division of the Specifications.
2. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Divisions 02 through 50 of the Specifications.
ITEM 2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGE AMOUNTS:
1. The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in
Substantial Completion of the Work under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph A is $600 per day.
2. The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in
completing work itemized on the Substantial Completion Certificate under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph B is $600 per day.
ITEM 3 - MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES IN GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.1 - COMMENCEMENT, EXECUTION & COMPLETION OF THE WORK
A. The Contractor shall be required to commence work 12.19.19 or promptly after receipt of the
contract from the Owner. B. The Contractor shall execute the work diligently so as to complete it within the time limit allowed
in this document. C. The Contractor agrees to complete this work required by the Contract on or before midnight
09.01.2020 D. Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the Contract. THE FOLLOWING ADDS TO SECTION 12.1 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 12.1 – INSURANCE AND BONDS Builders risk insurance will be provided by either the Contractor or Owner, dependent upon the below criteria Risk Management Guidelines, the cost of the Project.
1. Up to $100,000: (Owner Self-Insured) Builders Risk Policy is not required by Contractor. a. $5,000 deductible paid by Contractor per occurrence. b. Deductible is not a reimbursable or Cost of the Work, expense. 2. $100,001 to $5,000,000: Builders Risk Policy to be provided by Contractor. a. $5,000 policy deductible to be paid by Contractor b. Deductible is not a reimbursable or Cost of the Work, expense.
3. Over $5,000,000: Determined by LDS Church Risk Management on a per project basis and as specified in the Supplementary Conditions. Risk Management requires the following provisions and assignment to provide Builders Risk for this project. N/A END OF DOCUMENT
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (Cost Plus a Fee With GMP/Bonds)
Architecture & Construction Management Services • 283 University Operations • Rexburg, ID 83460-8205 • 208-496-2650
Brigham Young University-Idaho, a non-profit Idaho corporation, (“Owner”) and (“Contractor”) hereby enter into this Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (“Agreement”) and agree as follows:
1. Project. Project Name: KRK 2019 Demolition and Ceramics Lab Construction (“Project”) Project Number: 11513 2. Scope of Work. Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Documents. a. The Contract Documents consist of: 1) This Agreement; 2) The General Conditions (Special Project Major Cost Plus a Fee with GMP / Bonds—U.S.) (“General Conditions”) contained in the Project Manual titled and dated prepared by (“Architect”);
3) The Supplementary Conditions (Special Project Major Cost Plus a Fee with GMP / Bonds—U.S.) contained in the above-referenced Project Manual; 4) The Specifications contained in the above-referenced Project Manual;
5) The Drawings prepared by Architect entitled – Construction Documents, dated ; 6) Addendum Number(s) dated respectively; and 7) All Modifications to the Contract Documents.
b. The Contract Documents are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. c. The definitions set forth in the General Conditions will apply to the Contract Documents. d. The Contract Documents contain the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersede al prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. e. Modifications or other amendments to the Contract Documents must be in writing and as provided in the General Conditions. 4. Time of Commencement and Substantial Completion. a. Contractor will commence the Work on the date for commencement set forth in the Written Notice to proceed form Owner to Contractor. b. Contractor will achieve Substantial Completion and have the Work ready for Owner’s inspection no later than , as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Time is of the essence of the Contract Documents. 5. Contract Sum. a. Owner will pay Contractor for performance of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents the
Contract Sum consisting of: 1) The Cost of the Work as defined in the General Conditions; plus 2) The Contractor’s Fee which will be % of the final Cost of the Work (less that portion of the Cost of the Work
pertaining to Contractor’s premiums for insurance and bonds and amounts paid for permits, licenses and inspections), as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Notwithstanding Section 5.a above or any other provisions of the Contract Documents, Contractor guarantees that
the Contract Sum will not exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price which will be , as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor will not be entitled under any condition to receive from Owner any amount in excess of the Guaranteed Maximum Price. 6. Independent Contractor Relationship. Contractor is an independent contractor and is not the agent or employee of Owner.
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (Cost Plus a Fee With GMP/Bonds)
Architecture & Construction Management Services • 283 University Operations • Rexburg, ID 83460-8205 • 208-496-2650
7. Assignment. Contractor will not assign any right or obligation hereunder without the prior written consent of Owner, which consent may be granted or withheld in Owner’s absolute discretion. Contractor will not assign moneys due or
to become due to Contractor hereunder, nor will Contractor pledge the credit of Owner or bind Owner to any third party. 8. Ownership and Confidentiality. Owner will retain ownership and intellectual property rights in all materials provided by Owner to Contractor and to all work products of Contractor for services performed under this Agreement, such products and services of Contractor constituting works made for hire. Contractor will not reuse any portion of the materials provided by Owner or work products developed by Contractor for Owner pursuant to this Agreement or disclose any such materials to any third party without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may withhold its consent in its absolute discretion. 9. Notice. The parties hereby designate the following mailing addresses and email addresses to be used for sending Written Notice to the other party:
To Owner Attention: , Project Manager
Brigham Young University – Idaho Office 283 University Operations Building Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205
Email: To Contractor Attention: , , , , , Email:
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (Cost Plus a Fee With GMP/Bonds)
Architecture & Construction Management Services • 283 University Operations • Rexburg, ID 83460-8205 • 208-496-2650
10. Effective Date. The effective date of the Agreement is day of , . OWNER: Brigham Young University-Idaho, a non-profit Idaho corporation
President – BYU-Idaho Date
University Resources Vice President Date
University Operations Managing Director Date CONTRACTOR:
Authorized Representative Date
Print Name: Title: Contractor License No: Fed I.D.:
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1
SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work Sequence. 4. Purchase contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions. 9. Miscellaneous provisions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building 1. Project Location: Rexburg, Idaho; BYU Idaho Campus. B. Owner: BYU Idaho.
1. Owner's Representative: Kehl Murray; ph. 208 496-2665.
C. Architect: Brigham Young University-Idaho 525 South Center Street Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 Contact : Chad Alldredge 208-496-2659 alldredgec@byui.edu D. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Owner will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.
1. See Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for establishing, administering and using the Project Web site.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Spori Annex Building; +/-8,797 sq. ft., one story. B occupancy, Type IIB Construction. Steel frame building. 2. All other sitework and related activities as shown on the contract documents. 3. Alternates as described in section 01 2300
B. Type of Contract:
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.5 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Work shall be completed in one phase.
1.6 PURCHASE CONTRACTS
A. General: Owner has negotiated purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase contracts, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements.
B. Purchase Contracts Information: 1. Carpet: a. Carpet shall be provided by the Owner and installed by the Contractor using one of the pre- approved carpet installers specified in Section 09 6813. 2. Monument Signs: a. Provided by ?. See Section 01 2100.
1.7 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas designated by the construction limits shown on the drawings. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUMMARY 01 1000 - 3
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: With the exception of areas under construction, the Owner will occupy the Benson Building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. Owner will not occupy the Academic Building. The Contractor shall be aware of and conform to all rules, regulations and restrictions for construction activities on and around the campus and shall not interfere with the daily operation and circulation of students and faculty on and around the campus. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire project, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.
1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Weekend Hours: Work is not permitted on Sundays. Work is allowed on Saturdays from 7:00 AM until 7:00 PM. 2. Early Morning Hours: Restrictions on noisy work may be limited by Owner. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUMMARY 01 1000 - 4
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted on the BYU-I campus.
F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.
G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.
1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes as scheduled on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION A. The General Conditions shall take precedence over the specifications.
B. The Contract Documents should be read as a whole and whenever possible, the provisions should be construed in order that all provisions are operable. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complimentary, and what is required by one document or provisions thereof shall be as binding as if required by all of the documents or provisions thereof.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUMMARY 01 1000 - 5
C. The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor, or information which a Contractor of ordinary skill and expertise for the type of work involved would have known, before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once. If the Contractor performs any construction activity without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable cost for correction.
END OF SECTION 01 1000
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
ALLOWANCES 01 2100 - 1
SECTION 01 2100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 2. Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed
to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.
1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
ALLOWANCES 01 2100 - 2
1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.
1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
ALLOWANCES 01 2100 - 3
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. The following allowances include material cost and tax only. They do not include installation, receiving, handling and Contractor overhead and profit. See Section 01 1000 for additional specifications. 1. Monument Signs: $ includes installation by provider. Concrete footing by GC. END OF SECTION 01 2100
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
UNIT PRICES 01 2200 - 1
SECTION 01 2200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable
taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1: Mass Rock excavation and replacement with satisfactory soil material at Building footprint.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
UNIT PRICES 01 2200 - 2
1. Description: Classified rock excavation and disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off site, as required, according to Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of rock excavated, based on survey of volume removed. B. Unit Price No. 2: Rock Excavation and replacement with satisfactory soil material at Trenches.
1. Description: Classified rock excavation and disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off site, as required, according to Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of rock excavated, based on survey of volume removed. C. Unit Price No. 3: Cutting and patching of concrete floor slabs. 1. Description: Cutting of new or existing concrete floor slabs up to 6 inches thick, removal and excavation as required, and subsequent backfill, compaction, and patching of concrete according to Section 01 7300 "Execution." not otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square feet of concrete removed.
D. Unit Price No. 4: Miscellaneous and structural steel.
1. Description: Miscellaneous lintels and other supports not otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, according to Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" and Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications." 2. Unit of Measurement: Cost in place of pounds of fabricated steel as indicated on itemized invoice of steel supplier and verified by Architect.
E. Unit Price No. 5: Placement of grout in bedrock voids (lava tubes).
1. Description: Pump grout into lava tubes. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard of grout.
F. Unit Price No. 6: Lean Mix.
1. Description: Placement of Lean Mix under footings. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard. END OF SECTION 01 2200
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
ALTERNATES 01 2300 - 1
SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
ALTERNATES 01 2300 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
3.1 SCHEDULE
A. Alternate #1: (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 2300
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 1
SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 01 2300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product, fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 2
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC- ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 3
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.
C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution during the bid period only. Requests must be made prior to the date designated for the last addenda. Requests received after that time will be rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 2500
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 1
SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect’s form entitled, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use Contractor’s form. Submit through Owner’s project management system. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 2
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use Contractor’s form. Submit through Owner’s project management system. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor through the Owner’s project management system.
B. Weather Delays: Completion time will not be extended for normal bad weather or any weather that is reasonably foreseeable at the time of entering into the contract. The time for completion as stated in the contract documents includes due allowance for calendar days on which work cannot be performed out of doors. The Contractor acknowledges that it may lose days due to weather conditions. Contract time may be extended if all of the following are met and documented by the Contractor: 1. The weather prevented work from occurring that is on the critical path based upon the most recent CPM. 2. There are no concurrent delays attributed to the Contractor. 3. The Contractor took all reasonable steps to alleviate the impact of the weather. 4. The weather was catastrophic or significantly varied from standard weather/climate data recorded for Rexburg, Idaho as reported by the NOAA. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Work Change Directive through the Owner’s project management system. Construction Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Work Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 2600
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 - 1
SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 3. Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 4. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than 14 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. 4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 - 2
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials.
3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.
7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line- item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 - 3
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement, or if not stated, then the frequency of submittal may be not more than monthly.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.
E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 - 4
4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706 or similar, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A or similar, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707 or similar, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 2900
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 1
SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1
SUMMARY
A Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings. 6. Safety Plan.
B Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.
C Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field- engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 4. Section 01 4000 “Quality Requirements” for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
1
DEFINITIONS
A RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to the Project.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 2
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Contractor and each sub-contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.
b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 3
c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. 10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 4
1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings (AutoCAD 2018 and Revit 2018).
2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format and Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings (AutoCAD 2018 and or Revit 2018).
D. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate coordination drawing files into Building Information Model established for Project.
a. Perform three-dimensional component conflict analysis as part of preparation of coordination drawings. Resolve component conflicts prior to submittal. Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design requirements by Architect.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files
as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit 2018.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: Through Owner’s online project management system RFI process.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 5
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE
A. Use Owner’s internet Based Project Management Software for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions:
1. Project directory. 2. Project correspondence. 3. Meeting minutes. 4. Contract modifications forms and logs. 5. RFI forms and logs. 6. Task and issue management. 7. Photo documentation. 8. Schedule and calendar management. 9. Submittals forms and logs. 10. Payment application forms.
11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating. 12. Online document collaboration.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 6
B. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties may be granted access by the Owner to the Owner’s Internet Based Project Management Software.
1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid.
y. Security. z. Progress cleaning. aa. Safety Plan.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 7
1. Preinstallation Conferences for the following work shall be indicated in the Project Schedule: a. Steam line installation.
b. Sewer and water connections. c. Roofing. d. Landscape planting.
e. Landscape irrigation. f. Curtain wall framing. g. Cold-formed metal framing.
h. Project closeout. i. Commissioning per commissioning specifications.
j. High Voltage Work. k. Site Data Work. 2. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents. b. Options.
c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries. g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel. 4. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.
5. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 6. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 8
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures.
j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
E. Progress Meetings: Participation in progress meetings at regular intervals:
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: Representatives of Owner, Architect and Contractor; (subcontractors, suppliers, vendors and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall only participate when pre-arranged with the Architect). Contactor shall manage subcontractors outside of the progress meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 9
14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Architect shall be responsible for conducting the meeting and will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F. Coordination Meetings: Contractor shall conduct Project coordination meetings at his discretion and notify the Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 3100
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 1
SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 2
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. 3. One paper copy for each attendee at the progress meeting.
B. Startup construction schedule.
1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.
E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment.
F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. H. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
I. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
J. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 3
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.
B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 4
Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 01 1000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 01 1000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.
7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation. m. Schedule demonstration and training. n. Schedule Commissioning Activities. o. Submittal of O and M manuals and submittals; schedule 30 days prior to requesting Substantial Completion.
8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 5
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones:
1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time- scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use
no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 6
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 7
12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Work Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract
Documents.
2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01 3200
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 - 1
SECTION 013 233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Preconstruction video recordings. 4. Periodic construction video recordings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for unit prices for extra photographs. 2. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as project record documents at Project closeout. 4. Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 5. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 6. Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing operations commence.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph or video recording. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.
B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within seven days of taking photographs.
1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:
a. Name of Project. b. Date photograph was taken. c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. d. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
C. Construction Photographs: Upload to Owner’s Internet Based Project Management Service; prints not required.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 - 2
1. Identification: File names may be generated by the camera as long as names do not duplicate. Files shall be sorted in folders by date taken.
D. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings within seven days of recording. 1. Submit video recordings by posting to Project Web site. 2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information:
a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date video recording was recorded. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation
or story of construction. g. Weather conditions at time of recording.
1.4 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video disc in format acceptable to Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.
B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference on project web site. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect and Construction Manager.
C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 - 3
2. Take minimum 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take minimum 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.
D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take minimum 20 photographs weekly. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
E. Architect-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
END OF SECTION 01 3233
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 1
SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of
equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 2
corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule and within 21 days after receipt of the signed contract. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit 2018 and AutoCAD 2018.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 3
1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Standard protocol requires that all submittals be transmitted directly to the Architect and not to the Architect’s consultants; however, the Contractor may arrange with Architect, on a case by case basis, to transmit submittals simultaneously to the Architect and the specified Architect’s consultant only when such arrangements have been made with the Architect. Allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.
D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06 1000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06 1000.01.A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.
5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use Contractor’s own form. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information:
1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 4
6) Name of Contractor. 7) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 8) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 9) Category and type of submittal. 10) Submittal purpose and description. 11) Specification Section number and title. 12) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 13) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 14) Indication of full or partial submittal. 15) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 16) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 17) Remarks. 18) Signature of transmitter. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-06 1000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-06 1000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 5
G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. Deviations, Alternatives, corrections and changes in the field conditions shall be summarized on the cover sheet or transmittal and shall be highlighted in yellow in the submittal document. The Contractor shall not use submittals to infer approval of deviations, alternatives or changes in field conditions. All changes in the contract documents shall follow the procedures outlined in Section 01 2600. Action taken on a submittal shall not constitute a modification of the Contract.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals
that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. K. Review of submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.
L. Shop drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals are not contract documents. The submittal shall demonstrate, for the portions of the Work for which the submittal is required, the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
M. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring and review of shop drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals until the respective submittals have been approved in writing by the A/E. Such Work shall be in accordance with the approved submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Action Submittals: Submit electronic files of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.
3. Informational Submittals: Submit electronic files of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 6
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm). 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file. b. Paper Copies where indicated elsewhere.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 7
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 8
4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination" and where indicated by individual specification section.
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 9
2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
Y. Commissioning Plan.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Delegated Design Professional shall be licensed in the State of Idaho where required by state licensing laws.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 10
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT’S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. Architect shall mark submittals as follows: 1. “Approved”. 2. “Make Corrections Noted”. 3. “Revise and Resubmit”. 4. “Submit Specified Items”. 5. “See Attached Architect’s Review”. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 01 3300
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.
3. Individual Mockups: Mockups of specific assemblies that may or may not be connected or integrated into a room or exterior mockup. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 2
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 3. Submit electronic copy of manufacturer’s published installation instructions along with Mockup drawings.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.
B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 3
C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
1.7 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY PLAN
A. Safety Plan: Submit Safety Plan within 10 days of the Notice to Proceed and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Plan shall describe how the Contractor will insure the safety of the students, communicate this information to his sub-contractors and how it will be enforced. Plan shall also describe off limits areas, detours, haul routes, etc. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. Quality Control Plan shall be continuously updated and adapted to continuing project conditions and requirements. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time, on-site, personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. Quality Control Managers shall be provided in two fields of expertise: 1. Envelope Quality Control Manger: This person shall not be the Superintendent and shall be responsible for managing quality control for all planes of the envelope included, but not limited to, walls, glazed curtain walls, all weather flashings and roofing, and total envelope tightness. 2. Finishes Quality Control Manager: This person shall not be the Superintendent but may also be the Envelope Quality Control Manager. This person shall coordinate subcontractor work in relation
to quality control for all finishes including, but not limited to, paint, drywall installation, all finish ceilings, tiling of walls and floors, trim, millwork, casework, and all floor finishes. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 4
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspection. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 5
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 6
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers, supervisors and workmen who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. Only laboratory mockups may be integrated into the Work; all others shall be removed.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Quality Control Manager shall oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.
M. Room Mockups: Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Provide room mockups of the following rooms:
1.11 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 7
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 8
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct
special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and as identified in the 2012 IBC as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 7. Refer to Drawings for a complete list of Special Tests and Inspections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 9
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 4000
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 1
SECTION 01 4200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 2
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AABC Associated Air Balance Council www.aabc.com
(202) 737-0202
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org (847) 303-5664
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.transportation.org (202) 624-5800
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists www.aatcc.org (919) 549-8141
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.americanbearings.org (202) 367-1155
ACI American Concrete Institute (Formerly: ACI International) www.concrete.org
(248) 848-3700
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org (972) 506-7216
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) www.aeic.org (205) 257-2530
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878
www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700
AGA American Gas Association www.aga.org (202) 824-7000
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org (202) 872-5955
AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The) www.ahrinet.org (703) 524-8800
AI Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org (859) 288-4960
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837
www.aia.org (202) 626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 3
www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100
www.steel.org
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559
www.aitc-glulam.org
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150
www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020
www.ansi.org
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (607) 256-3313
www.aosaseed.com
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600
www.apawood.org
APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989
www.archprecast.org
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000
www.api.org
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
(See AHRI)
ARI American Refrigeration Institute
(See AHRI)
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917
www.asphaltroofing.org
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723
www.asce.org (703) 295-6300
ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning (800) 527-4723
Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400
ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers) (973) 882-1170
www.asme.org
ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (The) (847) 699-2929
www.asse.org
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040
www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628-6380
www.atis.org
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 4
AWEA American Wind Energy Association www.awea.org (202) 383-2500
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org (571) 323-3636
AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada www.awmac.com (403) 453-7387
AWPA American Wood Protection Association (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com
(205) 733-4077
AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353
www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337
www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com (212) 297-2122
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) www.gobrick.com (703) 620-0010
BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405
www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991
BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association) www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee www.bissc.org (866) 342-4772
BOCA BOCA (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.) (See ICC)
BWF Badminton World Federation (Formerly: International Badminton Federation) www.bwfbadminton.org
60 3 9283 7155
CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282
www.copper.org (212) 251-7200
CEA Canadian Electricity Association www.electricity.ca (613) 230-9263
CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555
www.ce.org (703) 907-7600
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com (216) 241-7333
CFSEI Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute (866) 465-4732
www.cfsei.org (202) 263-4488
CGA Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com (703) 788-2700
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 5
www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org (630) 584-1919
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org (404) 622-0073
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org (301) 596-2583
CPA Composite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com (703) 724-1128
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.org (706) 278-3176
CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523
www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (800) 328-6306 www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200
CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 www.csa.ca (416) 747-4000
CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org (416) 747-4000
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900
www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org (604) 820-7700
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org
(281) 583-4087
CWC Composite Wood Council (See CPA)
DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association www.dasma.com (216) 241-7333
DHI Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org (703) 222-2010
ECA Electronic Components Association www.ec-central.org (703) 907-8024
ECAMA Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association (See ECA)
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA)
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462
www.eima.com (703) 538-1616
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 6
www.ejma.org
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937
(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
www.esda.org
ESTA Entertainment Services and Technology Association
(See PLASA)
EVO Efficiency Valuation Organization (415) 367-3643
www.evo-world.org 44 20 88 167 857
FIBA Fédération Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00
(The International Basketball Federation)
www.fiba.com
FIVB Fédération Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 45
(The International Volleyball Federation)
www.fivb.org
FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300
www.fmglobal.com
FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
www.fmglobal.com
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671-3772
Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850
www.fluidsealing.com
FSC Forest Stewardship Council U.S. (612) 353-4511
www.fscus.org
GA Gypsum Association (301) 277-8686
www.gypsum.org
GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com
GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400
www.greenseal.org
HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700
www.pumps.org
HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association
(See AHRI)
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(See NAAMM)
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900
www.hpva.org
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550
www.hpwhite.com
IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (415) 536-0288
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 7
IAS
www.iapsc.org International Approval Services
(See CSA)
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC)
ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233
www.iccsafe.org (202) 370-1800
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net (770) 830-0369
ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance www.icpa-hq.org (703) 525-0511
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org (847) 827-0830
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch 41 22 919 02 11
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org (212) 419-7900
IES Illuminating Engineering Society (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) www.ies.org
(212) 248-5000
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (See IES)
IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology www.iest.org (847) 981-0100
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance www.igmaonline.org (613) 233-1510
IGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump Association www.igshpa.okstate.edu (405) 744-5175
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com (812) 275-4426
Intertek Intertek Group (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek.com
(800) 967-5352
ISA International Society of Automation (The) (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society) www.isa.org
(919) 549-8411
ISAS Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The) (See ISA)
ISFA International Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732
(Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association) www.isfanow.org (801) 341-7360
ISO International Organization for Standardization www.iso.org 41 22 749 01 11
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 8
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
(See ISFA)
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11
www.itu.int/home
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org
LMA Laminating Materials Association
(See CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864
www.lightning.org
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333
www.mbma.com
MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375-4718
www.metalconstruction.org
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138
www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610
www.metalframingmfg.org
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815
www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222
www.marble-institute.com
MMPA Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889
(Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association) (530) 661-9591
www.wmmpa.com
MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937
www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings (703) 281-6613
Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.org
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591
www.naamm.org
NACE NACE International (800) 797-6223
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200
www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926
www.nadca.com
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084
www.naima.org
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848
www.nbgqa.com
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 9
www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org (703) 713-1900
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org (301) 977-3698
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org (301) 657-3110
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association www.nelma.org (207) 829-6901
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org (703) 841-3200
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382
www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations www.nfhs.org (317) 972-6900
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000
NFPA NFPA International (See NFPA)
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org (301) 589-1776
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318
www.nhla.com (901) 377-1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org (604) 524-2393
NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (See NWFA)
NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association www.nomma.org (888) 516-8585
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545
www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400
NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275
(National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf.org (734) 769-8010
NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers www.nspe.org (703) 684-2800
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415
www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 10
www.ntma.com
NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422-4556
www.nwfa.org (636) 519-9663
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300
www.pci.org
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956
www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720
PLASA PLASA (212) 244-1505
(Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology
Association) www.plasa.org
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections
www.boltcouncil.org
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (706) 882-3833
www.rfci.com
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (925) 935-1499
www.redwoodinspection.com
SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323
(Society of Automotive Engineers) (724) 776-4841
www.sae.org
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
(See ICC)
SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542-5040
www.scte.org (610) 363-6888
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647
www.sdi.org
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010
www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424
www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424
SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers
(See ASCE)
SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888
www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 293-1995
www.steeljoist.org
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (773) 636-0672
www.smainfo.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (703) 803-2980
www.smacna.org
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100
www.smpte.org
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 11
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance www.sprayfoam.org (800) 523-6154
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau www.spib.org (850) 434-2611
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry www.spri.org (781) 647-7026
SRCC Solar Rating and Certification Corporation www.solar-rating.org (321) 638-1537
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355
www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772
www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331
STI Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com (847) 438-8265
SWI Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com (216) 241-7333
SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association www.swpa.org (847) 681-1868
TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association www.tilt-up.org (319) 895-6911
TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (Formerly: Tile Council of America) www.tileusa.com
(864) 646-8453
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.tema.org (914) 332-0040
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry (703) 907-7700
Association/Electronic Industries Alliance) www.tiaonline.org TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
(See TIA)
TMS The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org (303) 939-9700
TPI Truss Plate Institute www.tpinst.org (703) 683-1010
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555
TRI Tile Roofing Institute www.tileroofing.org (312) 670-4177
UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 12
www.ul.com
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org
(972) 243-3902
USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539
www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org
(800) 795-1747
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488
www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869
www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486
www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association www.wcmanet.org
(212) 297-2122
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301
www.wdma.com (312) 321-6802
WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (See MMPA)
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333
www.wsrca.com (650) 938-5441
WWPA Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org
(503) 224-3930
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0
www.din.de
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org (909) 472-4100
ICC International Code Council www.iccsafe.org (888) 422-7233
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (800) 423-6587
www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 13
COE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil (202) 761-0011
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov
(301) 975-4040
DOD Department of Defense http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil (215) 697-2664
DOE Department of Energy www.energy.gov (202) 586-9220
EPA Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov (202) 272-0167
FAA Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov (866) 835-5322
FG Federal Government Publications www.gpo.gov (202) 512-1800
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111
www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov (202) 708-1112
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Environmental Energy Technologies Division http://eetd.lbl.gov
(510) 486-4000
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (800) 321-6742
SD Department of State www.state.gov (202) 647-4000
TRB Transportation Research Board National Cooperative Highway Research Program www.trb.org
(202) 334-2934
USDA Department of Agriculture Agriculture Research Service U.S. Salinity Laboratory www.ars.usda.gov
(202) 720-3656
USDA Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service www.usda.gov
(202) 720-2791
USDJ Department of Justice Office of Justice Programs National Institute of Justice www.ojp.usdoj.gov
(202) 307-0703
USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227-8772
www.usp.org (301) 881-0666
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 14
USPS United States Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800
Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800
www.gpo.gov/fdsys
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-2664
Military Specifications and Standards
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus
(See FS)
FED-STD Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
Available from Defense Standardization Program
www.dsp.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration (800) 488-3111
www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design (202) 289-7800
Guide www.wbdg.org/ccb
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards
(See DOD)
USAB United States Access Board (800) 872-2253
www.access-board.gov (202) 272-0080
USATBCB U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board
(See USAB)
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CBHF State of California (800) 952-5210 Department of Consumer Affairs (916) 574-2041 Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation www.bearhf
ti.ca.gov
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 15
CCR California Code of Regulations Office of Administrative Law California Title 24 Energy Code www.calregs.com
(916) 323-6225
CDHS California Department of Health Care Services (Formerly: California Department of Health Services) (See CCR)
CDPH California Department of Public Health Indoor Air Quality Program www.cal-iaq.org
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (800) 848-5580
www.cpuc.ca.gov (415) 703-2782
SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District www.aqmd.gov (909) 396-2000
TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry http://txforestservice.tamu.edu
(979) 458-6606
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 4200
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 1
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
1.3
USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use and shall be billed to the Contractor through the duration of the Contract. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use and shall be billed to the Contractor through the duration of the Contract. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.
D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.
1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 2
3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:
1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures.
5. Other dust-control measures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm- ) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame- spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Progress Meetings will be held in the Owner’s facilities adjacent to the Project Site. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 3
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Hot water or Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds, as required, sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures".
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system or private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 4
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. F. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
G. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.
1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.
2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.
H. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
I. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.
J. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.
L. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 5
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted
to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated, or if not indicated, within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.
C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proof rolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Section 32 1216 "Asphalt Paving." D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Provide temporary or use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel if available.
F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 6
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide OSHA compliant temporary stairs to all above or below grade levels.
K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent, and requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Owner and Contractor comprise the Storm Water Team and are co- permittees. The Owner designs and retains control over any changes to site plans, SWPPPs, or storm water conveyance or control designs for the campus. The Contractor is responsible for SWPPP for the project site and shall oversee actual earth disturbing activities and daily implementation and maintenance of the controls specified in the SWPPP and other permit conditions. Storm Water Team personnel are listed on the Project-specific SWPPP-CAs. Both parties need to apply for coverage by filing a Notice of Intent (NOI). The Contractor is responsible for compliance with general permit requirements which can be viewed at http://www.epa.gov/npdes/pubs/cgp2012_finalpermit.pdf. Contractor responsibility includes installation and maintenance of controls, inspections, reporting and notifications, and training. Contractor personnel responsible for storm water compliance for project-specific SWPPP-CAs will be listed on the project-specific SWPPP-CA.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 7
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
G. Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed, and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.
L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire- retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 6. Protect air-handling equipment. 7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire- prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 8
ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 9
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 5000
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1
SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 01 2300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 01 4200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 2
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 3
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products:
a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 4
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 6000
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 1
SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 5. Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 2
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.
D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. Contractor shall provide a Certified Survey showing actual finish floor elevations of the Main Levels of the Academic Building and the Large Animal Building.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems.
k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:
a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.
d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 3
e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 4
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 5
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.
D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 6
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01 1000 "Summary."
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 7
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 8
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 9
3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements of manufacturer and in conjunction with consulting engineer.
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 01 7300
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 1
SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste. 2. Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 3. Section 04 4313.13 "Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer" for disposal requirements for excess stone and stone waste. 4. Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.
D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to
waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 2
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator. 2. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 3. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 4. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan. B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, means of recovery, and handling and
transportation procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 3
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:
1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather.
3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall be the Contractor’s, with the exception of those placed in Owner supplied dumpsters as required. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.
3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundled and sorted into Owner supplied and managed dumpsters and shall be the property of the Owner. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 4
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a. Comply with requirements in Section 32 9300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch.
C. Metals: 1. All metals/steel shall be sorted into Owner supplied and managed dumpsters and shall be the property of the Owner.
D. Copper: All copper waste shall be sorted into Owner supplied containers.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01 7419
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 1
SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 3233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other
Sections.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 2
1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior (except as noted below) to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 7. O and M manuals shall be submitted 30 days prior to requesting Substantial Completion inspection. 8. Demonstration and Training shall be scheduled, and the syllabus approved 30 days prior to requesting Substantial Completion inspections. 9. Record Drawings shall be submitted 10 days prior to requesting Substantial Completion inspection.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of
changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 3
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. 5. Punch list items shall be completed within 30 calender days and before final completion. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 4
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file and be provided in the electronic O and M. See Section 01 7823. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 5
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 01 7700
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 1
SECTION – 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer Comments on draft submittals.
2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 2
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page. 2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 3
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
F. Menu System and Navigation:
1. Submit manuals in the form of a menu driven system accessing electronic PDF files for each manual. 2. Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents. Bookmark the Table of Contents of each manual. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. Bookmarks will be included to reflect the navigation of the menu system. 3. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. G. File Conventions 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for a 300 dpi readable file size. 2. All scanned files will be Optical Character Recognized (OCR), such that the documents will be text searchable. 3. File Names: Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in electronic manual menus and indexes. 4. File indexes will be created in Adobe Acrobat or Blue Beam software systems.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 4
H. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, post-type binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple- volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 5
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 6
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents."
E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01 7823
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 1
SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Work Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information.
a. See Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 3
b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file, paper copy or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file, paper copy or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 4
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file, paper copy or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01 7839
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING 01 7900 - 1
SECTION 01 7900 - OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall train Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of systems and equipment listed in this Section and as mentioned in other sections. Where applicable, contractors shall coordinate with the Commissioning Team for developing the hours of instruction and scope of material to be covered. Training of Owner’s personnel shall not begin until Owner has approved the final submittal copy of the operation and maintenance manuals and training programs, and the building systems and equipment are complete and operational. B. Schedule Submittal. The proposed scope of training, training materials and instruction schedule shall be submitted for review and approval approximately 30 days before the scheduled completion of the work for which training is to occur. Mutually agreeable dates for training shall be arranged with Owner, but the training shall be completed before the Final Operational Test. Training shall not begin until the Contractor’s proposed training plan and schedule have been approved by the owner. C. The required training/demonstration indicated in the technical sections of the specifications is supplemental or in addition to the training required in this Section (where not a duplication). D. See Section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data” for related Closeout Submittals and Electronic Document System with Operation Manuals; 1.4, B and 2.3.
1.2 COORDINATED EFFORT A. The Contractor or Contractor provided professional training firm shall work closely with Owner’s personnel in the development and implementation of the training program. This includes preliminary meetings to map out the direction the training will take and development, with Owner’s approval, of the written training materials. B. The Commissioning Team will provide sample training session guidelines and agendas for use by the Contractors in developing their training programs where applicable. 2.0 REQUIREMENTS
2.1 SCOPE OF TRAINING A. Training must include both classroom and on-the-job (hands-on) instruction by qualified manufacturer’s representatives, vendors, installation/service technicians and operation personnel having the necessary knowledge, experience, and teaching skills. B. The training shall provide comprehensive instruction on the operation and maintenance of building components, equipment, controls, and systems including procedures for startup, shutdown, normal operation, abnormal operation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and corrective maintenance. C. The classroom portion of each training session shall be based on the information contained in the approved O&M Manuals and will use copies of these manuals for reference. This shall include the following items as applicable:
• Content and organization of appropriate O&M Manual materials
• Overall equipment / system layout and configuration
• Locations and tag numbers of major components
• Theory of Operation / Design Intent
• Startup and Shutdown Procedures
• Normal Operating Procedures
• Non-normal Operating Procedures (unoccupied, seasonal operation, etc.)
• Emergency procedures
• Health and Safety issues (both to O&M personnel and Building occupants)
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING 01 7900 - 2
• Energy Efficiency Issues
• Occupant Comfort and IAQ Issues
• Control System Sequence of Operation
• Preventive Maintenance Procedures • Diagnostic & Troubleshooting Procedures
• Corrective Maintenance & Repair Procedures D. The field portion of each training session shall at a minimum cover the following items as applicable: • Walk-down of covered equipment and systems
• Demonstration of startup, shutdown and operating procedures • Demonstration of diagnostic, service, maintenance and repair procedures E. All training sessions will be videotaped by the Contractor per Section 01 7823. F. Follow-up or post-occupancy training, where specified, shall be planned, scheduled and conducted per the requirements of this specification. This training will focus on seasonal issues that could not be addressed during the initial training and on addressing operational and maintenance issues identified by the Owner since turnover. 2.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF TRAINING A. The Contractor provided training will be directed at a group of Owner’s personnel who will act as a training cadre. B. The Contractor is responsible for providing training to this cadre in all systems and equipment needed to operate and maintain the Facility. C. This cadre will then be responsible for training other personnel assigned to the Facility. 2.3 LEVEL OF EXPERTISE OF INSTRUCTORS A. Contractor may use professional training firms. B. Credentials of training instructors are subject to review and approval by Owner.
1. Instructors must have knowledge and experience with the equipment on which they are providing training
2. Instructors must be familiar with the organization and content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the equipment on which they are providing training.
3. Instructors for controls must be knowledgeable and familiar with the specific controls equipment, project applications, and specific sequences of operation for this project. 2.4 TRAINING PROGRAM AND MATERIALS
A. The training program, in its entirety, shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall become the property of Owner. This includes but is not limited to: 1. All lesson plans, teachers' guides or training aids used to instruct the students. One complete set shall be given to Owner. 2. All written materials. e.g. workbooks, manufacturers' instructions, brochures, student tests, charts or other printed or photographed visual aids. Three (3) sets with one complete reproducible master shall be given to Owner. 3. All audio-visual materials e.g. video tapes, 35mm slides, film and audio cassettes, overhead projector transparencies, software files of presentations, or other audio visual medium. Three sets shall be given to Owner.
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING 01 7900 - 3
C. The Contractor shall provide all equipment related to the conveyance of the training program e.g. VHS video cassette recorders, color TV monitors, slide projectors, movie projectors, cassettes players, overhead projector, or other related equipment. Non-permanent mounted white boards, cork board and projector screens. Equipment of this nature provided by the contractors for use during training sessions does NOT become the property of Owner. Contractors shall promptly remove said equipment at the end of the training session(s).
2.5 CLASSROOM TRAINING A. Locations for classroom training sessions shall be coordinated with Owner. All training shall be conducted on-site except by prior arrangement and approval by Owner. B. Classroom space provided by the contractors for off-site training shall meet the following requirements:
1. The classroom shall be free of exterior visual and noise interference.
2. The classroom shall be lighted and climate controlled with ventilation, air conditioning and heating.
3. The classroom shall be lockable with secure or patrolled parking adjacent to the building.
4. Restroom and drinking water facilities shall be on the premises and food services nearby or provided on site.
5. The classroom shall facilitate the training of thirty (30) students. Tables, chairs and storage of audio-visual equipment and class written materials shall be provided. C. Any pre-approved off-site training shall include transportation, lodging and meals as appropriate. 3.1 TIME PERIOD OF TRAINING A. The minimum specific hours of training time provided for each category of major equipment and systems shall be in accordance with the specification sections pertaining to this equipment or systems. B. OWNER retains the option of redistributing training time, subject to the total time specified. This may include repetition of selected training sessions or provision for follow-up training sessions after occupancy. C. Training must be presented on an 8-hour per day, 5-day per week schedule, with all reading assignments and review to be within this period. (Note: eight (8) hour training days include 1/2 hour lunch and travel time.) D. Specific schedules for all training sessions must be coordinated in advance with Owner.
END OF SECTION 01 7900
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
2. Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
3. Section 01 7419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for procedures regarding waste
management, salvage and disposal.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to
be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and
deliver to Owner.
C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. Refer to drawings.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Sequence of selective demolition and removal work.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. A. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. B. Pre-demolition Photographs: Submit before Work begins. See Section 01 3233 – “Photographic Documentation”. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that applicable utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 3233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary."
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing or HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. 3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and walkways.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around demolition area. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction to the extent required and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. 2. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 3. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Refer to drawings. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged or Re-installed: Light poles, equipment per section 01 1000, trees and other materials noted on drawings. B. Existing Items to Remain: Refer to drawings.
END OF SECTION 02 4119
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 3300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. 2. Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 3. Section 32 1313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly ash and other pozzolans, subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D. Samples: For vapor retarder. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Welding certificates.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials. D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
2. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 3. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.
2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and
form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. B. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
D. Rustication Strips (if any): Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, L.A., gray. Supplement with the following: Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, class S as required, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) or 1 inch (25 mm) nominal, see mix design table in structural general notes. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; ARRMATECT. d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.
D. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+. b. Cortec Corporation; MCI- 2000. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S. d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Sheet Vapor Retarders shall have a permeance of less than 0.01 perms and testing in accordance with ASTM 1745, Section 7 and strength per ASTM E 1745,
Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.
B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 6
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE WB 30C. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV. b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure & Seal Plus. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear; LusterSeal 300. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25. h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30. k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30.
l. Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30. m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315.
2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 7
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM
C 109/C 109M.
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement
in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.01 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 8
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), Maximum. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) Maximum, or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 611 lb/cu. yd. (363(kg/cu. m) 3. Retain slump limit from two options in first subparagraph below or revise to suit Project. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) Maximum. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 7. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 3 lb/cu. yd. (1.80 kg/cu. m).
2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.13 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 9
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 10
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Unroll vapor retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement. 2. Lap vapor retarder over footings and/or seal to foundation walls. 3. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 4. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. 5. No penetration of the vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. 6. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all sides with tape.
3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.
2. Do not tack-weld reinforcing.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 11
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as needed, 65 foot maximum spacing. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 12
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed- surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 13
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power- driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated, exposed to view or to be covered with carpet or ceramic tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. Provide at carpeted slabs. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for slabs to receive thin floor coverings such as tile flooring. c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24. Provide at all exposed concrete floors.
D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated and where ceramic tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches (150 mm) high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 14
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:
a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 15
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.12 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 16
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports for floor flatness.
C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.
D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 17
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
(4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive- strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 48 hours of finishing.
END OF SECTION 03 3000
PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03 4800 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 03 4800 - PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes but not limited to the following:
1. Furnish and install precast concrete elements as described in Contract Documents including but not limited to the following: a. Splash blocks B. Products furnished but not installed under this section: 1. Precast window sills C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 04 2000 heading "Installation of precast members”. 2. Section 04 0523 "Masonry Accessories for flashing under precast units and cast in place anchor straps”. 3. Section 07 9213 "Elastomeric Joint Sealants”.
1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A615/A615M-16, ‘Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement'. b. ASTM A1064/A1064M-16b, 'Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete'. c. ASTM C33/C33M-16, 'Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates'. d. ASTM C150/C150M-16, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement'. e. ASTM C260/C260M-10a(2016), ‘Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete’. 2. ASTM International (following are referenced specifically for detectable warning panels): a. ASTM C39/C39M-15a, ‘Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens'. b. ASTM C140-16, ‘Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units'.
c. ASTM C293/C293M-16, ‘Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading)'. d. ASTM C418-12, ‘Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete by Sandblasting'.
PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03 4800 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer product literature for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. 2. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. 3. Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish. 4. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses. 5. Indicate type, size, and length of welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in hardware and connections. 6. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached to structure or other construction. 7. Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed. 8. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special conditions. 10. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on panel. 11. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials. 12. Indicate locations, dimensions, and details of stone facings, anchors, and joint widths. 13. If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept. A. Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three, representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm). 1. When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete. a. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing manufacturer's full range of colors. b. Grout Samples for Verification: Showing color and texture of joint treatment. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS:
A. Qualification Statements: 1. Letter certifying level of training and experience of installer, fabricator and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Bearing pads. 4. Reinforcing materails. 5. Brick units and accessories. 6. Stone anchors. 7. Insulation.
C. Material Test Reports: 1. For aggregates.
D. Design: 1. If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings.
PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03 4800 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.
E. Source Quality-Control: 1. Control test reports 2. Precast Concrete mix design: Submit compressive strength and water-absorption tests for each precast concrete mix design. F. Field quality-control reports. 1. Special inspection reports.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Check, carefully unload, and deliver material to site in such manner as to avoid soiling and damaging. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store material on planks clear of ground to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Materials Design Criteria: 1. Precast Concrete: a. Air Entrainment: Wet cast mixture maintains 5 to 7 percent air entrainment where surfaces are exposed to freeze-thaw. Admixture conforms to ASTM C260. b. Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. c. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II. d. Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31.03 MPa) concrete minimum.
e. Water: Potable water free from impurities. 2. Reinforcing: a. Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60. b. Reinforcing Mesh: ASTM A1064/A1064M.
3. Concrete Elements: a. Color: • Add Sand Blast textured integral color to mix. • Integral Color: Concentrated dry powder iron oxide pigments designed to meet samples and mock-up. • As approved by Architect.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9213: ‘Elastomeric Joint Sealants’.
PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03 4800 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.3 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Chamfered edges. 2. Smooth finish free from pits and rock pockets.
B. Splash Blocks: 1. 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long by 3 inches (75 mm) high 2. Formed water trough. 3. Cast in reinforcing mesh. C. Precast window sills: 1. Provide cast-in anti-drip groove. 2. Provide minimum of two (2) mounting dowels for each sill. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Splash Blocks: Set level in planting areas and centered under each downspout. B. Window Sills: 1. Install as shown on Contract Documents. 2. Coordinate all locations as described in Construction Documents. END OF SECTION 03 4800
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 1
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Masonry-cell insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry anchors. 2. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. 3. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 2
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.
E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 3
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness. 2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover
securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 4
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bull-nosed units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units and where indicated. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 5
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. 2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi (19.3 MPa). 2. Density Classification: Lightweight unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. 5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
6. Colors: Where indicated on drawings, provide integrally colored CMUs. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. Use open ended CMU for all built-in-place masonry lintels. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 6
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.
I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture.
J. Water: Potable. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Stainless steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm).
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm). 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interior, Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Exterior, Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 4. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 6. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304.
B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel, interior and stainless-steel, exterior wire.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 7
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel, interior and stainless-steel, exterior wire.
C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication, 0.109- inch- (2.78-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet]. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) stainless-steel wire. D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars [1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated bent to configuration indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts. B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.034-inch (0.86-mm), galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3-inch (76-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail) or Cheney 3-Way Flashing (Sawtooth). 2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. 3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically Keyed Flashing.
4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 8
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 7. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water. 8. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 9. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 10. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. 2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall Flashing. 4) Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. 5) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 6) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. 7) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. 8) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. 9) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 400.
10) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal. 11) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge, with a sealant stop or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal sealant stop]. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.
D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 3. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 9
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner. 2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc. 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. For all masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 10
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For all masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M; All other shall be Type S.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 3000 psi (14 MPa). 3. Provide grout with a slump of 10 to 11 inches (254 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 11
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half- size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 12
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch (19 mm) or more in width. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 13
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. horizontally.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.
C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3.9 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 6 inches (150 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 14
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.10 FLASHING A. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
B. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction, 28 days minimum or until specified strength is achieved. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Level 1 or Level 2 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 15
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days.
3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. END OF SECTION 04 2000
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 04 2113 - BRICK MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Face brick. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Ties and anchors. 4. Embedded flashing.
5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 4800 “Precast Concrete. Specialties” for installing precast concrete units. 2. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. 3. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for brick masonry. 4. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Stone Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone unit required.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Face brick, in the form of straps of four or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. 3. Weep holes/vents.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of four or more bricks. 2. Special brick shapes. 3. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 4. Vents. 5. Accessories embedded in masonry.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements in accordance with TMS 602 Art. 1.8C and 1.8D
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup as indicated on drawings. 2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units. 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. “Modular” face brick as manufactured by Interstate Brick, West Jordan, Utah.
2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX. 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. Verify on site to match existing mechanical enclosure brick to remain. 7. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 8. Where shown to "match existing," provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork. 9. Texture: Match Architect's samples.
10. Color: Golden Buff.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
c. Solomon Colors, Inc; SGS Mortar Colors.
E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Morset.
c. Sonneborn Products; Trimix-NCA.
G. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.187- inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire and as per structural general notes.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Heckman Building Products Inc, Melrose Park, IL www.heckmannbuildingprods.com 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Hauppauge, NY www.h-b.com 3. Wire-Bond by Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America, Charlotte, NC www.wirebond.com B. Design Criteria: 1. Seismic anchors for Seismic Design Categories A, B, C, D, E, and F. 2. Comply with seismic requirements for continuous wire in veneer to be integral component of anchor system. 3. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated on structural general notes: a. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating. b. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. c. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 6
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
4. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer. C. Brick Veneer Unit Masonry Attached to Framing: 1. Brick Ties: a. Design Criteria: 1) Sheet Metal (Carbon Steel): • Meet requirements of ASTM A1008/A1008M. • Provide seismic notch to accommodate 9 ga (3.8 mm) or 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) diameter continuous wire. • Thickness: 14 ga (1.9939 mm). 2) Finish: Hot dipped galvanized (ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2). 3) Tie Length: Length includes cavity air space and 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) brick overlap as per code. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) 360 L-Type Seismic Anchor by Heckmann. 2) 345 SV Seismic-Notch Veneer Anchor by Hohmann & Barnard. 3) 2522 Seismic Veneer Anchor by Wire-Bond. 4) Equals meeting Design Criteria as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. D. Brick Veneer Unit Masonry With Exterior Rigid Insulation Attached to Framing: 1. Brick Ties: a. Design Criteria: 1) Finish: Hot dipped galvanized (ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2). 2) Length: Total length includes cavity air space, exterior rigid insulation and 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) brick overlap as per code. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) HB-213-2X w/300-C Seismic Clip by Hohmann & Barnard.
2) 2-Seal Tie Veneer Anchor by Hohmann & Barnard. 3) Thermal 2-Seal Tie Veneer Anchor by Hohmann & Barnard. 4) Equals meeting Design Criteria as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs per structural general notes, and as follows:
a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
2. Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213S.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 7
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; DW-10-X-Seismiclip. 3) Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond clip. b. Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs to bridge insulation or sheathing and contact studs; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and extend beyond pronged legs. c. Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap-in grooves for inserting continuous wire. Size wire tie to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. d. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 1.05-inch- (2.66- mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. e. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter hot-dip galvanized, carbon]-steel wire.
F. Fasteners: 1. Class Two Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200: a. Steel Framing: Non-corrosive screws of length, type, and quantity recommended by Manufacturer.
2. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 (4.83-mm) diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) ITW Buildex; Illinois Tool Works, Inc; Teks Maxiseal with Climaseal finish. 2) Leland Industries Inc; Master Drillers with DT2000 Longlife Coating and Master Seal Bonded Washer. 3) Textron Inc; Elco Dril-Flex with Stalgard finish.
3. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with
hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 (4.83-mm) diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener. 2) ITW Buildex; Illinois Tool Works, Inc; Scots long life Teks.
2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall Flashing.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 8
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3) Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 4) Heckmann Building Products, Inc; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing.. 5) Meadows, W.R.,Inc; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. 6) Polyguard Products, Inc; Polyguard 400.
b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. 2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester- reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Du Pont; Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Flex-Flash. 3) Hyload, Inc; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System. 4) Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Total Flash.
b. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. c. Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of adhesive. d. Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive. Where flashing extends to face of masonry, rubberized-asphalt coating is held back approximately 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from edge. 1) Color: Gray.
e. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
3. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Firestone Specialty Products; FlashGuard. 3) Heckmann Building Products, Inc; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.. 4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Epra-Max EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc; EPDM Flashing.
B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing with a sealant stop or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge or elastomeric thermoplastic flashing with drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal sealant stop. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 9
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.
B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
C. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm) long. 2. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) BLOK-LOK Limited; Cell-Vent. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4) Heckmann Building Products, Inc; No. 85 Cell Vent.. 5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Quadro-Vent.
6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.
3. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net Weep Vents.
4. Vinyl Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, offset, T-shaped units made from flexible PVC, designed to fit into a head joint and consisting of a louvered vertical leg, flexible wings to seal against ends of masonry units, and a top flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; in color selected by Architect. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; #343 Louvered Weep Hole. 2) Williams Products, Inc; Williams-Goodco Brick Vent. 3) Wire-Bond; Louvered Weepholes.
D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Advanced Building Products Inc; [Mortar Break] [Mortar Break II]. b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc; Stone Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 10
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. d. Sheets or strips not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick and installed to full height of cavity with additional strips 4 inches (100 mm) high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.
2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and
manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. Do not use muriatic acid. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. PROSOCO, Inc. 2.9 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Mix to match Architect's sample.
3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Face brick. b. Face brick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 11
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit
adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 12
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm); do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half- size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond or bond pattern indicated on Drawings if shown; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly
with masonry around built-in items. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 16 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.
3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 13
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.8 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm).
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.
D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 14
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 4. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
E. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), to maintain drainage. F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. G. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.
C. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.
BRICK MASONRY 04 2113 - 15
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04 2113
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel. 2. Field-installed shear connectors. 3. Grout. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 2. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for surface-preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections.
C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:
1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm).
D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited.
E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.
1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Energy and Environmental Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. 8. Provide two sets of hardcopy (prints) submittals on full size sheets in addition to electronic media submittal. D. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, shop-painting applicators, professional engineer, and testing agency. B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
E. Product Test Reports: For the following:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control and special inspection reports. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172) or approved equal. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE or approved equal. C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.
C. Construction: Moment Frame System
2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345).
B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: See plans. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11. G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.
H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible- washer type with plain finish.
B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible- washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating or baked epoxy-coated finish.
C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex
head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.
I. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.
J. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018. K. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Amscot Structural Products Corp. b. Fluorocarbon Company Limited. c. R.J. Watson Bridge & Structural Engineered Systems.
d. Seismic Energy Products, L.P.
2. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE, PTFE and mirror-finished stainless steel. 3. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.06. 4. Design Load: Not less than 2,000 psi (13.7 MPa). 5. Total Movement Capability: 3 inches (75 mm). 2.4 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 6
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.5 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." and SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth. H. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 7
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or Slip critical, see drawings.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
2.9 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 8
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 9
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or Slip critical, see plans. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, provide a 5/16” fillet weld and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 10
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
B. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1. Perform bend tests on shear connections. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
END OF SECTION 05 1200
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2100 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 05 2100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. LH- and DLH-series long-span steel joists. 4. Joist accessories.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 2. Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 3. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.
B. Energy and Environmental Submittals:
1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2100 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer. B. Welding certificates.
C. Manufacturer certificates.
D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated.
1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level. 2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the following:
a. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span, total load. b. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span, total load.
2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2100 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K- Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members. C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
F. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48). 2.3 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle
top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.
1. Joist Type: LH-series steel joists. 2. End Arrangement: underslung or Square, as indicated. 3. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel typically, see plan for curved top chord. B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
C. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
D. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. Provide bridging at first panel point on bottom of joists. B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint. C. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications."
D. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2100 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
E. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
H. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.
2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick. C. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are applied.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2100 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.
E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.
B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.
C. Visually inspect bolted connections. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements. E. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 2100
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck. 2. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 3. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 4. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck. 5. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Energy and Environmental Submittals: 1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company. 2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. 3. CMC Joist & Deck. 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group. 5. Cordeck. 6. DACS, Inc. 7. Epic Metals Corporation. 8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group. 11. Roof Deck, Inc. 12. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc. 13. Verco Manufacturing Co. 14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180). 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Interlocking seam.
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company. 2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. 3. CMC Joist & Deck. 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
5. Cordeck. 6. DACS, Inc. 7. Epic Metals Corporation. 8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group. 11. Roof Deck, Inc. 12. Verco Manufacturing Co.
13. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: 2 inches (51 mm). 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch (1.20 mm). 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. C. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0474-inch (1.20-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth. E. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
F. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, with factory- punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter, if required.
G. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.5 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.6 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
2.7 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location, if required.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (305 mm)], see plans: 1. Mechanically clinch with Verco punch loc or equal.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.
D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space welds or mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one weld or fastener at each corner.
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten. E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.
2.8 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm) apart. 3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. 4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location, if required. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (305 mm), and as follows: 1. Mechanically clinch with Verco punch lok or equal.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.
E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.
2.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 6
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.10 PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 3100
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 05 4000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Delegated Design Responsibilities. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Ceiling joist framing. 4. Soffit framing.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Section 09 2116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non-loadbearing, metal- stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies. 3. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-loadbearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
a. All cold-formed metal framing for the exterior walls and others as indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional structural engineer licensed in Utah responsible for their preparation.
b. Stamped Drawings and calculation submittal(s) shall include a written descriptive narrative of how the system functions to accommodate story drift and other building movements. c. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and engineering qualifications submitted with bid proposals and shop drawings.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
1. Steel sheet.
2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors.
4. Mechanical fasteners.
5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips
7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."
E. Designer Qualifications: Design and detail cold formed light gage framing systems under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in the State of Idaho. Engineer retained to design shall have a minimum of 10 years of appropriate framing design and detailing experience equivalent or similar to the system proposed for this facility. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 3. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 5. Craco Mfg., Inc. 6. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 7. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company. 8. State Building Products, Inc. 9. Steel Construction Systems.
10. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 11. Steel Structural Systems. 12. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 13. United Metal Products, Inc. 14. United Steel Manufacturing. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C). 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of L/360 for floors, L/300 for roofs.
5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213. C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent. B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection or Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275). 2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.054 inch (1.73 mm), see plans. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8” inches (50 mm). 3. Section Properties: As required, see plans.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/2 inches (41 mm) Minimum. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. b. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. d. MarinoWARE. e. SCAFCO Corporation. f. Steel Network, Inc. (The). g. Steeler, Inc.
D. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) or stud thickness,
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
whichever is greater. b. Flange Width: [1-1/2 inch (37 mm) plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1-1/2 inch (37 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications.
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) or stud thickness, whichever is greater. b. Flange Width: The sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1-1/2 inch (37 mm).
E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. 2.5 CEILING JOIST FRAMING
A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched with standard holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0346 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 3. Section Properties: As Required. 2.6 SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 3. Section Properties: As Required. 2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 12. Steel Network or equal. a. Drift Track. b. Stiff Clips HE. c. Stiff Clips LB.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 6
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B or ASTM A 780.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix
at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.
D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 7
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to- line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 8
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
H. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.
J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. 2. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to building structure. 3. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 4000 - 9
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud- track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 4000
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Elevator hoist beams. 5. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Metal bollards. 8. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.
C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted- channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 2. Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. 3. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing." 4. Section 05 5213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Energy and Environmental Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Elevator hoist beams. 5. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings and loading-dock edge angles. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Loose steel lintels. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.
G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
H. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.3
FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc- plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air- entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2- inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
2.7 METAL LADDERS A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 6
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12.7-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Harsco Industrial IKG, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac. 2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a division of W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT. 6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 7. Galvanize and prime exterior ladders, including brackets. 8. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 2.8 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts for controls and holes for wire. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire.
B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger than OD of bollard.
C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 7
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer indicated. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast cleaning." 3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 8
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 05 5000
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 1
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Steel tube railings attached to concrete stairs. 2. Steel tube handrails and guards attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube handrails and guards attached to other adjacent materials.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 2. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). Spacing to leave <4” clear. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 2
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Fittings and brackets.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 3
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. c. Other approved local fabricators meeting the specification requirements.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). Size to match that specified in
1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch diameter top and bottom rails and 1/1/2 inch diameter posts. 2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-1/2-inch diameter intermediate rails spaced less than 4 (100-mm) inches clear.
3. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 4
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
D. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.
1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 5
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings:
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 6
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
C. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Phosphatize.
E. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 7
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.
C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 2. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends.
C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 8
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 5213
Blank Page